Anda di halaman 1dari 888

MVT21GB

Chapter
BEFORE YOU START
1 USING VT STUDIO
Chapter
SCREENS &

Design Tool for Touch Panel Displays 2 WINDOWS


Chapter

VT STUDIO Ver. 7 3 FILES & PRINTING

Chapter

VT3 Series 4 EDIT

Chapter

5 DISPLAY

Reference Manual Chapter


BEFORE YOU START
6 SETTING PARTS
Chapter
SETTING GRAPHICS &
• Descriptions of VT3 series programming 7 TEXT
Chapter
SETTING SWITCHES &
8 LAMPS
Chapter
SETTING
9 BASIC PARTS
Chapter
SETTING METERS &
10 IMAGES
Chapter

11 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Chapter

12 RESOURCE

Chapter
COMMUNICATION
13 BETWEEN PC & VT3
Chapter
SYSTEM MEMORY
14 AREA
Chapter

15 PLC DATA FOLDER

Chapter

16 WORKSHEET

Chapter
ETHERNET
17 CONNECTION
Chapter

18 LADDER MONITOR

Error Message Lists


List of Shortcut Key Commands
About Unusable Characters
Preface
This manual describes the functions, settings configurations and precautions for VT STUDIO.
Read carefully before use to fully utilize the features of Touch Panel Display VT3 Series* and performance of VT
STUDIO. Keep handy for future reference.
The Touch Panel Display VT3 Series User Manual consists of this Manual and the following manuals intended for use
together.
* To use Touch Panel Display VT5 Series, refer to VT5 Series Reference Manual.
Name Description
Describes the operation of VT STUDIO and the screen rendering methods used by
VT5 Series Reference Manual
the program when VT5 Series Touchscreen Display is used.
This manual. Describes the operation of VT STUDIO and the screen rendering
VT3 Series Hardware Manual
methods used by the program when VT3 Series Touchscreen Display is used.
This manual describes how to install and configure hardware for the VT5 Series
VT5 Series Hardware Manual
Touchscreen Display.
This manual describes how to install and configure hardware for the VT3 Series
VT3 Series Hardware Manual
Touchscreen Display.
This manual describes how to connect and configure the VT5 Series/VT3 Series
VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series
Touchscreen Display and the DATA STORAGE TERMINAL DT SERIES with PLCs
PLC Connection Manual
manufactured by other vendors.
VT Transfer Tool User's Manual This manual describes how to install, operate and set up VT Transfer Tool.
* All of the above manuals are available on the VT STUDIO DVD.
Symbols
This Manual uses the following symbols to alert you to important information. Be sure to read these.

DANGER Failure to observe this item causes a risk that consequently results in death or serious injury.

WARNING Failure to observe the items mentioned may result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION Failure to observe the items mentioned may result in medium or minor injury.

NOTICE Failure to observe this item may cause damage to the product itself as well to other property.

Important Notes on operations that are always performed

Point Cautions on operations that are often performed incorrectly.

Here are listed items further enriching the understanding of the main text, and the information useful to
Reference
know.

Page or manual providing related information

Request
(1) No part of this instruction may be reprinted or reproduced without the prior written permission of KEYENCE CORPORATION.
(2) The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
(3) In case any doubt, error or miss is found in this manual, please call the telephone number recorded on the back
of this manual.
(4) Note that KEYENCE CORPORATION shall not be liable for any influence resulting from operation of the VT
series regardless of item (3) above.
(5) We shall replace any missing or incorrectly collated pages.

• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation of the United States.


• Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
• AutoCAD and DXF are registered trademarks of USA-based Autodesk Inc.
• Other company names, product names, and model names used in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
• UNLHA32. DLL are public domain software made by Micco.
Safety Precautions
General Precautions
• At startup and during operation, be sure to monitor the functions and performanceof the VT3 series.
• We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage in the event that a problem
occurs.
• Do not modify the VT3 series or use it in any way other than described in thespecifications. The functions and
performance of products used or modified in thisway cannot be assured.
• When the VT3 series is used in combination with other instruments, functions and performance may be degraded,
depending on operating conditions and the surrounding environment.
• Do not subject instruments including peripheral devices to sudden changes in temperature. Doing so might cause
condensation which may cause the instrument or device to malfunction.
• Mount the VT3 as far away as possible from power lines or high-voltage lines. Noise from power lines and high-
voltage lines may cause the VT3 to malfunction.

Do not use the touch panel (touch switches), cross-key pads or push-button switches on the
switch unit to make switches that may affect human life or lead to product damage. Also,
WARNING design a system that is adaptable to touch panel (touch switches), cross-key pad or push-
button switches on the switch unit malfunction.

• Do not touch the touch panel or touch switches with a sharp-pointed object such as a pen
or screwdriver. Doing so might scratch the touch panel or touch switches or cause them to
malfunction.
• Do not subject the touch panel (touch switches), cross-key pad or push-button switches on
the switch unit to shock or impact, or touch them with more than necessary force.
NOTICE Doing so might damage them.
• Never wipe the display with paint thinner or organic solvents. Doing so might damage the
display. When wiping the display, use a soft cloth moistened with watered down neutral
detergent.
• Do not copy copyrighted fonts and image data onto this unit for use as this infringes on the
copyright.

About CE Marking and UL Approval


For details on precautions for CE marking, and for UL Approval, refer to the "VT3 Series Hardware Manual".

1509EManual (VT3 Series) -


- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference 1
Software License Agreement
NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS
"AGREEMENT") CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION OF THE [VT STUDIO] (THIS
"SOFTWARE"), YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITONS OF
THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ANY TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT
USE THIS SOFTWARE.

1. Definition
1.1 "use" or "using" means to access, install, download, copy, or otherwise benefit from using the
functionality of This Software.
1.2 "This Software" means the software and all associated documentation provided by KEYENCE.

2. Grant of License.
Conditioned upon compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, KEYENCE
grants you a nonexclusive and nontransferable license to install this Software on all computers used
in a single business address (factory, division, office) in order to use the KEYENCE product. You will
require user registration to use the software. Without registration, only one license is available for
one computer. You may make one copy of this Software for backup or archive purposes only.

3. Restrictions.
3.1 Other than installation of updates or new functions provided by KEYENCE, you may not modify
or add any functions to This Software.
3.2 You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble This Software.
3.3 You may not create derivative works based on This Software.
3.4 Other than expressly stated by KEYENCE, you may not resell, retransfer, rent or otherwise
redistribute this Software to any third parties.

4. Intellectual Property Rights.


Except as expressly stated herein, KEYENCE reserves all right, title and interest in this Software,
and all associated copyrights, trademarks, and other intellectual property rights therein.

5. Disclaimer.
Keyence is licensing this Software to you "AS IS" and without any warranty of any kind.
In no event will KEYENCE or its suppliers be liable to you for any damages, claims, costs or any lost
profits caused by using this Software.

6. Termination.
6.1 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically if you destroy this Software and
the copy of this Software in your possession or voluntarily return this Software to us.
6.2 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically without any notice from
KEYENCE if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Promptly
upon termination, you shall cease all use of this Software and destroy all copies, full or partial,
of this Software in your possession or control.
6.3 You will compensate KEYENCE for costs or any lost profits caused by your violation or breach
of any term of this Agreement.

7. Governing Law.
7.1 This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws of
Japan without regards to the principles of conflicts of law.
7.2 If any part of This Agreement is found void and unenforceable, it will not affect the validity of the
balance of This Agreement, which shall remain valid and enforceable according to its terms and
conditions.

2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


How This Manual Is Organized
Chapter 1
BEFORE YOU START
This chapter describes the precautions before using VT STUDIO.
USING VT STUDIO

Chapter 2 SCREENS & WINDOWS


This chapter describes the configuration of the Edit screen and other screens, and
restrictions when making screens. 1
Chapter 3 FILES & PRINTING This chapter describes how to make new data files, and read, save and print files.
2
Chapter 4 3
This chapter describes operations such as moving, scaling, deleting, copying and
EDIT
rotating drawn graphics, text and parts.

Chapter 5 4
This chapter describes how to display the catalog and grid, and the functions of the
DISPLAY
various tool bars that are displayed in windows.

Chapter 6
BEFORE YOU START This chapter describes how to set the color and line type in the graphic or part setting
SETTING PARTS windows, and other information you should know before you start setting other parts. 5
Chapter 7
SETTING GRAPHICS &
TEXT
This chapter describes how to set graphics and text.
6
Chapter 8
SETTING SWITCHES &
7
This chapter describes how to set switches and lamps.
LAMPS

Chapter 9
This chapter describes how to set numerical value displays, text displays, and other
SETTING BASIC PARTS
basic parts.
8
Chapter 10
SETTING METERS &
This chapter describes how to set meters and images.
IMAGES
9
Chapter 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS This chapter describes screen callups, loading DXF files, and other functions.

10
Chapter 12
This chapter describes some methods of creating new screens and using the list of
RESOURCE
screen callups, etc.
11
Chapter 13
COMMUNICATION This chapter describes the settings of the target VT3 models and PLC and the
BETWEEN PC & VT3 communication between PC and VT3.
12
Chapter 14
SYSTEM MEMORY This chapter describes the system memory area and how to manipulate the system
AREA memory area by the PLC.

13
Chapter 15
This section describes PLC data folder functions and how to operate the PLC Data
PLC DATA FOLDER
Folder Editing Tool.

14
Chapter 16
This chapter describes how worksheets operate, how to set worksheets, and
WORKSHEET
worksheet functions.

Chapter 17
ETHERNET This section briefly describes the Ethernet connection and how to set up the Ethernet 15
CONNECTION connection.

Chapter 18 LADDER MONITOR This section describes ladder monitor and the setting method.
16
Appendices APPENDICES These appendices list error messages and shortcut code tables. 17
18
A

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3


Contents
Preface
Safety Precautions ...........................................................................................................................1
Software License Agreement ..........................................................................................................2
How This Manual Is Organized........................................................................................................3
Contents ............................................................................................................................................4
Conventions Used In This Manual ................................................................................................15
Terminology .................................................................................................................................... 15
Symbols .......................................................................................................................................... 15

Chapter 1 BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


1-1 How to Draw and Edit with VT STUDIO........................................................................1-2
Models types that can use VT STUDIO to draw and edit ..............................................................1-2
Notes on drawing or editing VT5 files ............................................................................................1-2
Notes about drawing and editing with VT2-speicific files ................................................................1-2
1-2 About Compatibility .......................................................................................................1-3
VT1/VT2/VTS Files ........................................................................................................................1-3
Compatibility among Different Versions ..........................................................................................1-7
1-3 About the Shift JIS and UNICODE Versions ................................................................1-8
About the Shift JIS and UNICODE Versions...................................................................................1-8
1-4 Operating Environment .................................................................................................1-9
Operating Environment for VT-H7J (Japanese Version) and VT-H6G (Global version) .................1-9
1-5 Installation of VT STUDIO ...........................................................................................1-10
Preparion for installation ...............................................................................................................1-10
Precautions for Installation............................................................................................................1-10
How to Install ................................................................................................................................ 1-11
1-6 Installation of USB Driver............................................................................................1-15
Precautions When Using USB ......................................................................................................1-15
Install USB Driver in Windows 10/8/7/Vista ..................................................................................1-15
Install USB driver in Windows XP .................................................................................................1-15

Chapter 2 SCREENS & WINDOWS


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens ................................................................2-2
Edit Window ....................................................................................................................................2-2
Screen Configuration ......................................................................................................................2-5
2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens ...........................................................................2-14
Restrictions in the Number of Pages and Number of Screens .....................................................2-14
Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................2-14

Chapter 3 FILES & PRINTING


3-1 File Manager ...................................................................................................................3-2
New(N)............................................................................................................................................3-2
Open ...............................................................................................................................................3-4
Loading VT2 Files ...........................................................................................................................3-5
Loading VT1 Files ...........................................................................................................................3-6
Close...............................................................................................................................................3-7
Save................................................................................................................................................3-8
Save as/Compress and Save .........................................................................................................3-8
Import..............................................................................................................................................3-9
Read from Memory Card ..............................................................................................................3-14

4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Write to Memory Card...................................................................................................................3-15
Verify with Memory Card...............................................................................................................3-17
Comparing VTS Files....................................................................................................................3-18
Operating Log File Loading...........................................................................................................3-19
Ladder Monitor Data Verification...................................................................................................3-20
File Log .........................................................................................................................................3-22
Exit ................................................................................................................................................3-22
3-2 Print...............................................................................................................................3-23
Print Settings.................................................................................................................................3-23
Print Preview.................................................................................................................................3-31
Print ..............................................................................................................................................3-31
Output Screen Data BMP File.......................................................................................................3-31

Chapter 4 EDIT
4-1 Editing Graphics ............................................................................................................4-2
Operation Basics.............................................................................................................................4-2
Move ...............................................................................................................................................4-2
Scaling Graphics.............................................................................................................................4-3
4-2 Edit Functions ................................................................................................................4-6
Selecting Objects (graphics) ...........................................................................................................4-6
Selecting Individual Objects............................................................................................................4-6
Selecting Object Groups .................................................................................................................4-6
Continuously Selecting Objects ......................................................................................................4-7
Canceling Selection ........................................................................................................................4-7
Object Selection Frame and Selection Handles .............................................................................4-7
Select one from many .....................................................................................................................4-8
Select one from the Cascaded Components ..................................................................................4-8
Undo ...............................................................................................................................................4-9
Redo ...............................................................................................................................................4-9
Cut ..................................................................................................................................................4-9
Copy ...............................................................................................................................................4-9
Paste.............................................................................................................................................4-10
Delete ...........................................................................................................................................4-10
Select all .......................................................................................................................................4-10
Search .......................................................................................................................................... 4-11
Multiple copy .................................................................................................................................4-12
Grouping .......................................................................................................................................4-14
Order.............................................................................................................................................4-15
Rotate/Flip.....................................................................................................................................4-16
Place/Align ....................................................................................................................................4-16
Screen attribute settings ...............................................................................................................4-18
Parts Attribute Settings .................................................................................................................4-19
Register part attribute as default settings .....................................................................................4-19
Changing the Switch Area ............................................................................................................4-20
Edit Callup Screen ........................................................................................................................4-20
Change Key Entry Order...............................................................................................................4-21
Option Settings .............................................................................................................................4-22
Edit Apex ......................................................................................................................................4-30

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5


Chapter 5 DISPLAY
5-1 About Various Display Functions.................................................................................5-2
Part Catalog ....................................................................................................................................5-2
Screen catalog ................................................................................................................................5-5
Tool bar ...........................................................................................................................................5-8
Status bar......................................................................................................................................5-14
Workspace ....................................................................................................................................5-15
Switch grid/Grid.............................................................................................................................5-22
Set grid .........................................................................................................................................5-22
Guide line......................................................................................................................................5-23
Switch Area...................................................................................................................................5-23
Scale Display ................................................................................................................................5-24
Scroll Edit Window ........................................................................................................................5-24
Select and Edit Screen .................................................................................................................5-24
Overlap Other Screen ...................................................................................................................5-26
Active Edit .....................................................................................................................................5-26
Label .............................................................................................................................................5-26
Device No. ....................................................................................................................................5-27
Memo ............................................................................................................................................5-27
Device ON/OFF Display................................................................................................................5-27
View Mode ....................................................................................................................................5-28

Chapter 6 BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types .............................................................................6-2
Color Selection and BLK.................................................................................................................6-2
Line Type Selection.........................................................................................................................6-4
Line Attribute Settings.....................................................................................................................6-5
Plane Attribute Settings ..................................................................................................................6-6
6-2 About Touch Switches ..................................................................................................6-7
About Touch Switches.....................................................................................................................6-7
6-3 Key Entry Parts ............................................................................................................6-10
Key Entry Part Modes ...................................................................................................................6-10
Key Entry Part Modes When the Screen is Displayed.................................................................. 6-11
Switching the Key Entry Part Mode by Touch Switches................................................................6-12
Key Entry Order ............................................................................................................................6-15
Selecting Key Entry Parts by Switches .........................................................................................6-16
Switching the Key Entry Part Mode by PLC Devices....................................................................6-17
6-4 About Fonts ..................................................................................................................6-23
Fonts Available on the VT3 ...........................................................................................................6-23
6-5 About Text Codes ........................................................................................................6-24
Text Codes Available on the VT3..................................................................................................6-24
About UNICODE ...........................................................................................................................6-24
6-6 About Devices ..............................................................................................................6-25
Target (reference) Devices............................................................................................................6-25
Overview of VT Internal Devices and VT Link Devices.................................................................6-27
Structure of VT Internal Devices and VT Link Devices .................................................................6-28
VT Internal Device ........................................................................................................................6-29
Link Device ...................................................................................................................................6-36
6-7 Setting of Devices........................................................................................................6-37
Items Selectable in the Device Setting Field.................................................................................6-37

6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Setting Methods ............................................................................................................................6-38
6-8 Indirect Reference........................................................................................................6-43
About Indirect References ............................................................................................................6-43
Indirect Reference Setting Examples............................................................................................6-46
Cautions for Indirect References ..................................................................................................6-48
6-9 Calculation....................................................................................................................6-49
Type of Calculation .......................................................................................................................6-49
Setting Calculation ........................................................................................................................6-51
Calculation Precision and Data Format Conversion Rules ...........................................................6-56
Cautions in Calculations ...............................................................................................................6-60
Calculation Setting Example .........................................................................................................6-61

Chapter 7 SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


7-1 Setting Graphics ............................................................................................................7-2
Types of Graphics and Drawing Graphics ......................................................................................7-2
Setting Graphics .............................................................................................................................7-3
7-2 Image Setting .................................................................................................................7-5
Image Setting..................................................................................................................................7-5
7-3 Setting Decorative Frames............................................................................................7-6
Setting Decorative Frames .............................................................................................................7-6
7-4 Setting Outline Text .......................................................................................................7-7
Setting Outline Text.........................................................................................................................7-7
Outline Text Logo Settings ..............................................................................................................7-8
7-5 Setting Bitmap Text .....................................................................................................7-10
Setting Bitmap Text .......................................................................................................................7-10
7-6 Setting Memos ............................................................................................................. 7-11
Setting Memos .............................................................................................................................. 7-11
7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls..........................................................................................7-12
Graphic Attribute Control Restrictions...........................................................................................7-12
Setting Graphic Attribute Controls ................................................................................................7-12

Chapter 8 SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


8-1 Setting Styles and Nameplates.....................................................................................8-2
Setting Nameplates.........................................................................................................................8-2
Setting Style ....................................................................................................................................8-5
Setting the Style and Nameplate of N State Lamps ........................................................................8-7
8-2 Setting Switches ............................................................................................................8-9
Setting Switches .............................................................................................................................8-9
Adding Switch Functions...............................................................................................................8-33
Setting Extended Functions ..........................................................................................................8-35
8-3 Setting Lamp Switch....................................................................................................8-36
Setting Lamp Switches .................................................................................................................8-36
Adding Switch Functions...............................................................................................................8-37
Setting Extended Functions ..........................................................................................................8-37
8-4 Setting Lamps ..............................................................................................................8-38
Setting Lamps ...............................................................................................................................8-38
8-5 Setting of N State Lamp..............................................................................................8-39
Setting of N state lamp.................................................................................................................8-39
8-6 Setting N State Parts....................................................................................................8-41
Setting N State Parts.....................................................................................................................8-41

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7


8-7 Setting of Cross-key (only for VT3-V7R)....................................................................8-45
Setting of cross-key ......................................................................................................................8-45
8-8 Function Switch Settings (Only for Handy Series) ...................................................8-46
Function switch settings................................................................................................................8-46

Chapter 9 SETTING BASIC PARTS


9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays ................................................................................9-2
Setting Numerical Value Displays ...................................................................................................9-2
Internal Annotation of Float (real numbers) ..................................................................................9-16
9-2 Setting Text Displays ...................................................................................................9-17
Setting Text Displays.....................................................................................................................9-17
About Text String Data ..................................................................................................................9-27
About Specifying Text Color by Device .........................................................................................9-28
Kanji Conversion Mode.................................................................................................................9-29
9-3 Setting Message Displays...........................................................................................9-36
Outline of Message Displays ........................................................................................................9-36
Setting message displays .............................................................................................................9-36
Editing the Content of Messages ..................................................................................................9-45
Message Display Examples..........................................................................................................9-51
9-4 Setting Alarm Displays................................................................................................9-54
Overview of Alarm Display............................................................................................................9-54
Normal Alarm, Extended Alarm ....................................................................................................9-57
Setting Alarm Displays..................................................................................................................9-60
Alarm System Settings..................................................................................................................9-82
Examples of How to Use Alarm Displays......................................................................................9-92
Printing Alarm Logs.......................................................................................................................9-98
9-5 Setting Video Displays ................................................................................................9-99
Setting Video Displays ..................................................................................................................9-99
9-6 Setting Animation Display ........................................................................................9-102
Setting of Animation Display .......................................................................................................9-102
9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices ....................................................................... 9-111
Placing Function Control by Devices .......................................................................................... 9-111
9-8 Setting BMP File Switching.......................................................................................9-140
Setting BMP File Switching.........................................................................................................9-140
9-9 VNC Display Settings ................................................................................................9-144
VNC Display Settings..................................................................................................................9-144
VNC server settings ....................................................................................................................9-145

Chapter 10 SETTING METERS & IMAGES


10-1 Setting Meters ..............................................................................................................10-2
Setting Meters...............................................................................................................................10-2
About Scale Layout.....................................................................................................................10-21
10-2 Setting Statistical images .........................................................................................10-22
Setting Statistical images ............................................................................................................10-22
10-3 Setting Trend images.................................................................................................10-28
Overview .....................................................................................................................................10-28
About Trend image Settings .......................................................................................................10-29
Normal Trends/Extended Trends ................................................................................................10-29
Setting Trend images..................................................................................................................10-32
Trend image Precautions ............................................................................................................10-56

8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Trend image (real time) System Settings....................................................................................10-57
10-4 XY image Settings......................................................................................................10-62
Overview .....................................................................................................................................10-62
About settings of XY images......................................................................................................10-64
Normal Trends/Extended Trends ................................................................................................10-64
XY image settings .......................................................................................................................10-64
XY image Precautions ................................................................................................................10-84
System Settings of XY image (real-time) ....................................................................................10-84

Chapter 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS


11-1 Call Up Screen.............................................................................................................. 11-2
Call Up Screen.............................................................................................................................. 11-2
Placing Screen Callups................................................................................................................. 11-4
11-2 Load DXF file ................................................................................................................ 11-5
Load DXF File ............................................................................................................................... 11-5
About Conversion Rules ............................................................................................................... 11-6
11-3 Ruled Line Creation ..................................................................................................... 11-7
Ruled Line Creation ...................................................................................................................... 11-7
11-4 Table.............................................................................................................................. 11-8
Make a Table................................................................................................................................. 11-8
Register a Part in a Cell .............................................................................................................. 11-11
Copy/Paste a Cell ....................................................................................................................... 11-12
Notes .......................................................................................................................................... 11-12
11-5 Form Printing ............................................................................................................. 11-13
Form Printing .............................................................................................................................. 11-13
11-6 Changing Display Text Strings ................................................................................. 11-18
Outline of Changing Display Text Strings.................................................................................... 11-18
How to Set Change Display Text Strings .................................................................................... 11-19
Setting Display Text Strings ........................................................................................................ 11-20
How to Change Display Text Strings........................................................................................... 11-29
About Operations during Changing Display Text Strings ............................................................ 11-31
11-7 Active Edit .................................................................................................................. 11-32
Active Edit ................................................................................................................................... 11-32
11-8 Multiple Program Startups ........................................................................................ 11-35
11-9 Batch Edition of the Part Attributes ......................................................................... 11-36
Batch Edition of the Part Attributes ............................................................................................. 11-36
The batch edition of the switch function units ............................................................................. 11-37
11-10 Device Comments......................................................................................................11-38
Overview of Device Comment .................................................................................................... 11-38
Loading Device Comments......................................................................................................... 11-38
Precautions about Loading device comments ............................................................................ 11-41
List of Device Comments ............................................................................................................ 11-41
11-11 Operation Log ............................................................................................................11-44
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 11-44
Using the operation records........................................................................................................ 11-45
Set the Operation Log................................................................................................................. 11-46
Capture the operation Log .......................................................................................................... 11-46
List of the Operation Log............................................................................................................. 11-47
Display List of Operation Log and the Edit Window.................................................................... 11-48
The Relation Between the Contents of the Operation Log and Memory Capacity ..................... 11-49
The contents recorded in the operation records ......................................................................... 11-51

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9


Chapter 12 RESOURCE
12-1 New Screen...................................................................................................................12-2
New Screen ..................................................................................................................................12-2
12-2 VT Model Setting..........................................................................................................12-9
VT Model Setting ..........................................................................................................................12-9
12-3 PLC Model Settings ................................................................................................... 12-11
PLC Model Settings .................................................................................................................... 12-11
12-4 VT System Parameters ..............................................................................................12-12
About Setting of VT System........................................................................................................12-12
VT System ..................................................................................................................................12-12
Communication Condition...........................................................................................................12-15
System Memory Area .................................................................................................................12-16
Password ....................................................................................................................................12-17
Parts............................................................................................................................................12-21
Changing display character strings.............................................................................................12-22
Operation Log .............................................................................................................................12-22
KL ...............................................................................................................................................12-23
Barcode ......................................................................................................................................12-24
Memory Card ..............................................................................................................................12-25
Printer .........................................................................................................................................12-26
Video...........................................................................................................................................12-27
VNC Server.................................................................................................................................12-28
PLC time synchronization ...........................................................................................................12-29
VT Timer .....................................................................................................................................12-30
Other ...........................................................................................................................................12-31
12-5 Windows Font ............................................................................................................12-34
Windows Font Setting .................................................................................................................12-34
12-6 Device Transfer ..........................................................................................................12-38
Overview of Device Transfer.......................................................................................................12-38
Settings of device transfer ..........................................................................................................12-38
Restrictions/Notices for Device Transfer.....................................................................................12-40
12-7 Global Function Control............................................................................................12-43
Overview of Global Function Control ..........................................................................................12-43
Global Function Control Settings ................................................................................................12-43
Restrictions/Notices for Global Function Control ........................................................................12-44
12-8 Cross-reference .........................................................................................................12-45
Displaying Cross-references.......................................................................................................12-45
12-9 Data Check .................................................................................................................12-46
All Data Check ............................................................................................................................12-46
Current Page Check ...................................................................................................................12-48
Global function control check......................................................................................................12-50
Version Check.............................................................................................................................12-51
12-10 Batch-change Device.................................................................................................12-52
Batch-change Device..................................................................................................................12-52
12-11 Screen Configuration Management .........................................................................12-53
Page Configuration Management ...............................................................................................12-53
Operations in Page Configuration Management.........................................................................12-53
12-12 List of Screen call ......................................................................................................12-58
List of Screen call........................................................................................................................12-58
12-13 Ladder Monitor Data ..................................................................................................12-59

10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


List of call screens ......................................................................................................................12-59
12-14 Global Function Switch (Only for Handy Series) ....................................................12-62
Global function switch settings....................................................................................................12-62

Chapter 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3


13-1 Preparations for Communication Between PC & VT3 ..............................................13-2
Communication Between PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3...................................................................13-2
Preparations for Communication Between PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3 .......................................13-2
Precautions on Communication Between PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3..........................................13-3
13-2 Communications Settings...........................................................................................13-4
Communications Settings .............................................................................................................13-4
List of Connection Destinations ....................................................................................................13-5
Connection Test ............................................................................................................................13-9
13-3 PC->VT Send Data......................................................................................................13-12
PC->VT Send Data .....................................................................................................................13-12
13-4 PC -> VT Send Screen Data Differences ..................................................................13-19
PC -> VT Send Screen Data Differences....................................................................................13-19
13-5 VT -> PC Receive Data...............................................................................................13-21
VT -> PC Receive Data ..............................................................................................................13-21
13-6 PC <--> VT Verify Data ..............................................................................................13-27
PC<-->VT Verify Data .................................................................................................................13-27
13-7 Simulator ....................................................................................................................13-30
Preparing the Simulator ..............................................................................................................13-30
Starting Up Simulator ..................................................................................................................13-31
Simulator Menu...........................................................................................................................13-31
How to Operate Simulator...........................................................................................................13-32
13-8 Remote COM Port Tool..............................................................................................13-37
Startup of the COM Port Tool ......................................................................................................13-37

Chapter 14 SYSTEM MEMORY AREA


14-1 About System Memory Area .......................................................................................14-2
System Memory Area ...................................................................................................................14-2
Setting System Memory Area .......................................................................................................14-3
14-2 VT Mode ........................................................................................................................14-4
VT Mode List.................................................................................................................................14-4
Details of VT Mode ......................................................................................................................14-5
14-3 MT Compatible Mode ................................................................................................. 14-11
MT Compatible Mode List ........................................................................................................... 14-11
Details of MT Compatible Mode..................................................................................................14-12
14-4 PLC-Based Page Switching ......................................................................................14-17
How to Switch Pages in the VT Mode.........................................................................................14-17
14-5 Turning Windows ON/OFF by PLCs .........................................................................14-21
How to Turn Windows ON/OFF in the VT Mode .........................................................................14-21
14-6 Displaying Interrupt Windows by PLCs...................................................................14-24
Outline of Interrupt Windows.......................................................................................................14-24
How to Display Interrupt Windows in the VT Mode.....................................................................14-25

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11


Chapter 15 PLC DATA FOLDER
15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)...........................................................................15-2
Structure of PLC Data Folders ......................................................................................................15-2
Flow Up to Execution of PLC Data Folders ..................................................................................15-4
About PLC Data Folder Data ........................................................................................................15-5
Size of PLC Data Folder Data.......................................................................................................15-8
PLC Data Folder Precautions ..................................................................................................... 15-11
About Compatibility with VT1 Data .............................................................................................15-12
About the data compatibility between VT2 and VT3 ...................................................................15-12
Editing PLC Data Folder Data.....................................................................................................15-13
PLC Data Folder Editing Tool......................................................................................................15-14
PLC Data Folder Editing Tool Menu............................................................................................15-15
How to Operate PLC Data Folder Editing Tool ...........................................................................15-17
Send/Receive of PLC Data Folder Data .....................................................................................15-21
15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder ....................................................................................15-22
Executed under the RUN mode of the VT3 Series .....................................................................15-22
Executed Under the System Mode of the VT3 Series ................................................................15-39

Chapter 16 WORKSHEET
16-1 About Worksheets .......................................................................................................16-2
Worksheets OverDisplay ..............................................................................................................16-2
About Worksheet Settings ............................................................................................................16-3
Worksheet Restrictions .................................................................................................................16-4
16-2 Setting Worksheets .....................................................................................................16-6
Starting Up the Worksheet Editing Tool ........................................................................................16-6
Worksheet Editing Tool Menu .......................................................................................................16-7
How to Set Cells ...........................................................................................................................16-8
About Calculation Precision on Worksheets and Data Format Conversion Rules......................16-26
About the Data Check.................................................................................................................16-28
Displaying List of Used Devices..................................................................................................16-30
Handy Functions Provided by the Worksheet Editing Tool .........................................................16-32
Importing Worksheets .................................................................................................................16-34
16-3 Worksheet System Settings......................................................................................16-36
Worksheet System Settings........................................................................................................16-36
16-4 Precautions when Handling Worksheets.................................................................16-39
Behavior When an Error Occurs during Worksheet Execution ...................................................16-39
Other ...........................................................................................................................................16-40
16-5 Worksheet Function ..................................................................................................16-41
List of Functions..........................................................................................................................16-41
ABS.............................................................................................................................................16-42
AVERAGE...................................................................................................................................16-44
CHOOSE ....................................................................................................................................16-46
COUNT .......................................................................................................................................16-52
COUNTIF ....................................................................................................................................16-54
IF.................................................................................................................................................16-57
LARGE........................................................................................................................................16-66
LARGEPOS ................................................................................................................................16-68
MATCH .......................................................................................................................................16-70
MAX ............................................................................................................................................16-75
MIN .............................................................................................................................................16-77

12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


SMALL ........................................................................................................................................16-79
SMALLPOS.................................................................................................................................16-81
SUM ............................................................................................................................................16-83
SUMIF.........................................................................................................................................16-85
16-6 Application Example of Worksheets ........................................................................16-88
Example 1: display in parallel the superintendents and production capacity according to the
production sequence................................................................................................................16-88
Application example 2: display the bar graph. ............................................................................16-90
Application example 3: set relay as ON at PM5:00(17:00)of every Friday..................................16-91
Application example 4: output from KL according to the value of barcode. ................................16-93

Chapter 17 ETHERNET CONNECTION


17-1 About Ethernet Connection ........................................................................................17-2
Overview .......................................................................................................................................17-2
17-2 How to Setup Ethernet ...............................................................................................17-3
PLC Model Settings ......................................................................................................................17-3
PLC Communication Setup...........................................................................................................17-3
17-3 Set Up an Ethernet Connection Using the Edit Screen............................................17-5
Describe how to set up an Ethernet connection. .........................................................................17-5
To set up the devices for the Ethernet connection. .......................................................................17-5
Run Ethernet PLC Data Folders ...................................................................................................17-6

Chapter 18 LADDER MONITOR


18-1 Ladder Monitor.............................................................................................................18-2
Overview of Ladder Monitor..........................................................................................................18-2
Procedures before Starting Ladder Monitor ..................................................................................18-4

APPENDICES
1 Error Message Lists...................................................................................................... A-2
When starting UP/Shutting Down VT STUDIO and Opening/Closing Files .................................. A-2
Multiple Program Startups ............................................................................................................ A-3
When changing target VT ............................................................................................................. A-3
When Changing Target PLC ......................................................................................................... A-4
During Communications with VT and When Performing the Data Check ..................................... A-4
When Sending the System Program ............................................................................................. A-6
When Editing Screens .................................................................................................................. A-7
Active Edit ..................................................................................................................................... A-8
When Setting Options ................................................................................................................... A-8
When Loading DXF Format Files .................................................................................................. A-8
Operation Log ............................................................................................................................... A-9
System Setting .............................................................................................................................. A-9
When Connecting Over Ethernet ................................................................................................ A-10
Changing Display Text Strings .................................................................................................... A-10
Workspace .................................................................................................................................. A-10
Page Configuration Management ............................................................................................... A-11
Part Catalog ................................................................................................................................ A-11
During Printing or Printing of RTF Files ...................................................................................... A-12
Device Comments ....................................................................................................................... A-12
In the Simulator ........................................................................................................................... A-12
PLC Data Folder Editing Tool Related ........................................................................................ A-13

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13


Worksheet Related ..................................................................................................................... A-16
Help ............................................................................................................................................ A-17
2 List of Shortcut Key Commands ............................................................................... A-18
3 About Unusable Characters....................................................................................... A-20
Unusable character in file name saved in memory card ............................................................. A-20
4 Adding and Modifying Options ................................................................................. A-23
Changing/Adding of VT2 BUILDER Ver.3->VT STUDIO Ver.1 .................................................. A-23
Changing/Adding of VT STUDIO (Ver.1->Ver.2) ........................................................................ A-27
Change/Add VT STUDIO (Ver.2 -> Ver.3) .................................................................................. A-30
Change/Add VT STUDIO (Ver.3 -> Ver.4) .................................................................................. A-32
Change/Add VT STUDIO (Ver.4 -> Ver.5) ................................................................................. A-32
5 Index............................................................................................................................. A-34

14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Conventions Used In This Manual
The following shows how pages are configured, and the symbols and terminology used in this manual.

Terminology
This Manual uses the following terminology excluding some instances.
Term Description
Programmable controllers made by various manufacturers that are connected to VT3 series
PLC touch panel display.
PC Stands for personal computer.
VT5 VT5 series touch panel display.
VT3 VT3 series touch panel display.
VT STUDIO Design tool VT-H7J (Japanese version)/VT-H7G (Global version) for the VT5/VT3 series.
VT2 VT2 series touch panel display.
VT2 BUILDER Design tool VT2-H1E (VT2-H1) for the VT2 series.
VT1 Touch Panel Display VT series.
VT BUILDER Design tool VT-H7W for the VT series.
This software is used for displaying data sending/receiving information and record data receiving
VT Transfer Tool on the screen of VT3 series touch panel display.

Symbols
This Manual uses the following symbols to show menus and buttons.
Symbol Description
These are menu items. Menu items can be selected from the menu bar.
These are window names or items names.
""
These are buttons containing text that are used for executing operations or canceling in
windows, for example.
Ctrl These are keys on the PC's keyboard.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15


16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
1 1

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


BEFORE YOU START
USING VT STUDIO
This chapter describes the precautions before using VT STUDIO.

1-1 How to Draw and Edit with VT STUDIO ••••••••••••••• 1-2


1-2 About Compatibility •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-3
1-3 About the Shift JIS and UNICODE Versions•••••••••• 1-8
1-4 Operating Environment ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-9
1-5 Installation of VT STUDIO•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-10
1-6 Installation of USB Driver••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-15

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-1


1-1 How to Draw and Edit with VT STUDIO

Models types that can use VT STUDIO to draw and edit


1 VT STUDIO can be used to draw and edit on all VT5 Series/VT3 Series/VT2 Series models.
Data created by VT STUDIO can be transferred to the machines.
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

Point The system to start differs based on the VT model (VT5 Series/VT3 Series/VT2 Series) used
with VT STUDIO Ver. 6.
The system to start for each Series is as follows:
• VT5 Series : VT STUDIO (for VT5 Series)
• VT2/VT3 Series : VT STUDIO (for VT3 Series)

Notes on drawing or editing VT5 files

This manual describes the functions available to draw and edit on the VT3 Series Touchscreen Display, as well as
how to configure them and notes about the functions.
If you are using VT5 Series Touchscreen Display, please refer to "VT5 Series Reference Manual".

Notes about drawing and editing with VT2-speicific files

• When using VT STUDIO to create and edit VT2-specific files, the available functional options at the components
are the same as those provided by VT2 BUILDER Ver.3. The functions of the newly added or modified components
on VT3 cannot be used. Editing actions such as retrieving and activities editing, however, can still be performed.
For more information about adding and modifying functions, please refer to “Adding and Modifying Options”.
• To edit the VT2 files created by VT2 BUILDER with VT STUDIO, please execute “Reading VT2 Files”.
• VT2-specific data created by VT STUDIO cannot be opened with VT2 BUILDER.
• To transmit the VT2-speicific data created by VT STUDIO to VT2, you need to upgrade the system program to Ver.4.

 How to use this manual when VT2 models are used


This manual mainly deals with the VT3 series.
In the case of VT2 models being used, you can generally get relevant information from this manual simply by
replacing “VT3” with “VT2”.
The available options for specific components and functions, however, are the same as those provided by VT2
BUILDER Ver.3.
In addition, for important information about the use of VT2 models, please see specific VT2 manuals. See the PDF
files in the folder, the destination folder of VT STUDIO Manual(\Manual\VT2).

1-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-2 About Compatibility

VT1/VT2/VTS Files
VT1 and VT2 files that are read into VT STUDIO are converted into VTS files. 1
For more information, please see "3-1 File Manager".

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


 VT1 File
After being read into VT STUDIO, the VT1 files are changed into VTS files (VT3-specific).
Data transmission to the VT2 series can also be performed by changing the VTS files (VT3-specific) into the VTS files
(VT2-specific).
VT STUDIO cannot create VT1-specific files.

Ο Read

VT1 files
X Write

VT STUDIO
VTS files (VT3-specific)

VT3->VT2 conversion

VTS files (VT2-specific)

Ο Transmit Ο Transmit

VT3 Series VT2 Series


(system program Ver.4)

 Notes about VT3 -> VT2 conversion


To change VT3 series into VT2 series, use Menu -> Resources(R) -> VT Model settings (V) to select your desired VT
series.
• When VT3 series where MultiTalk is selected are changed into VT2 series, the PLC_B soft device should also be
set up.
• In some cases, the PLC communications settings on the VT system settings may be initialized.
• Settings of the components added on VT3 are initialized. (for example, the Windows fonts setting will be changed
to bitmap fonts).
• Represented colors are reduced to 4096 colors.
• In case the target PLC is not supported by VT2 series, a failure may occur to the changing.
• In case the number of images used by VT3 series are higher that those used by VT2 series, a failure may occur to
the changing.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-3


1-2 About Compatibility

 VT2 File
After being read into VT STUDIO, VT2 files are changed into the VTS files (VT2-specific).
1 Data transmission to the VT3 series can also be performed by changing the VTS files (VT2-specific) into the VTS files
(VT3-specific).
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

VT STUDIO cannot create the VT1-specific files.

Ο Read

VT2 File
X Write

VT STUDIO
VTS files (VT2-specific)

VT2->VT3 conversion

VTS files (VT3-specific)

Ο Transmit Ο Transmit

VT2 Series VT3 Series


(system program Ver.4)

 Notes about VT2 -> VT3 conversion


To change VT2 series into VT3 series, use Menu -> Resources(R) -> VT Model settings(V) to select your desired VT
series.
• In some cases, the PLC communications settings on the VT system settings may be initialized.
• Where bitmap images are used, the represented colors may increase. (this, however, only applies to the case
where the original image files are already available in the PC).

 VTS File
When using VT STUDIO to create new files, first decide they are for VT3 series or VT2 series, then create VTS files.
Special attention should be paid to halfway change from VT3 to VT2 or vise versa.
"Notes about VT3 -> VT2 conversion", page 1-3
"Notes about VT2 -> VT3 conversion", page 1-4

VTS files
VTS files (VT3-specific)
(VT3-specific) VTS files
VTS files (VT2-specific)
(VT2-specific)
VT STUDIO
VT STUDIO
VT3->VT2 conversion
conversion VT2->VT3
VT2->VT3
VT3->VT2
conversion
conversion
VTS files
VTS files (VT2-specific)
(VT2-specific) VTS files
VTS files (VT3-specific)
(VT3-specific)

 Transmit
 Transmit  Transmit
 Transmit  Transmit
 Transmit  Transmit
 Transmit

VT3 Series
VT3 Series VT2 Series
VT2 Series VT2 Series
VT2 Series VT3 Series
VT3 Series
(system program
(system program Ver.4)
Ver.4) (system program
(system program Ver.4)
Ver.4)

1-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-2 About Compatibility

 Memory card-specific VT files


The memory card-specific VT1 files of VT1 (*.DAT, *.DT3, *.DT5) cannot be directly read by VT STUDIO. Please first
open them with VTBUILDER and save the same as VT1 files, then open them with VT STUDIO. 1

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


X
X Read
Read
Memory card-specific
Memory card-specific VT1
VT1 files
files
(*.DAT,*.DT3,*.DT5)
(*.DAT,*.DT3,*.DT5)
X Write
X Write

VT STUDIO
VT STUDIO

The memory card-specific VT2 files of VT2 (*.md1,2,3) cannot be directly read by VT STUDIO.
To rewrite with VT STUDIO, they need to changed to memory card-specific VT2 files (*.md4).

Read
Memory card-specific VT2 files
(*.md1,2,3)
X Write

VT STUDIO
Transmit
Read Write

Transmit Memory card-specific VT2 files


(*.md4)

VT2 Series X Transmit X Transmit


(System program Ver.4)

VT3 Series VT2 Series


(System program Ver.1 to 3)

Memory card-specific VT3 files can only be used by VT3.

Memory card-specific VT3 files

VT STUDIO
Transmit X Transmit

VT3 Series VT2 Series

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-5


1-2 About Compatibility

 Other

1  To process data with VT2 BUILDER

 VT->PC data receive *1


BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

Ο PC->VT data transmit


VT2 Series
(System program Ver.4)

X Read
VT2 BUILDER

X Write
Memory card-specific VT2 files
(*.md4)

*1 The data transmitted by VT STUDIO cannot be received by VT2 BUILDER.


The data transmitted by VT2 BUILDER can be received by VT2 BUILDER.

 Data receive/transmit by VT STUDIO and VT2 series


Cannot send data to VT2 on which System program Ver.1 to 3 is run. To use VT STUDIO to receive/send data, you
need upgrade the system program to Ver.4.

Ο VT->PC data receive

X PC->VT data transmit


VT2 Series
(System program Ver1 to 3) VT STUDIO

Ο VT->PC data transmit


Ο PC->VT
data transmit

VT2 Series
(System program Ver.4)

 Data receive/transmit by VT STUDIO and VT1 series


Cannot send to/receive from the VT1 series.

X VT->PC data receive

X PC->VT data transmit


VT1 Series
(System program Ver.1 to 5) VT STUDIO

1-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-2 About Compatibility

Compatibility among Different Versions


The extension names of VTS files are as follows.
1
Extension name

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


VT STUDIO Memory card-specific VT files
VTS File
VT3-specific VT2-specific
Ver.1 vs1 vu1 ms1 md4
Ver.2 vs2 vu2 ms2 md4
Ver.3 vs3 vu3 ms3 md4
Ver.4 or later vs4 vu4 ms4 md4

Ο Open VTS files

X Open VTS files


VT STUDIO Ver.1/Ver.2/Ver.3 VT STUDIO Ver.4 or later
(*.vs1, *.vu1, *.vs2, *.vu2, *.vs3, *.vu3) (*.vs4, *.vu4)
• All VTS files (*.vs* and *.vu*) can be opened in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions. However, only VTS files
(*.vs4, *.vu4, *.vs3, *.vu3, *.vs2, and *.vu2) can be saved.
• VTS files (*.vs4 and *.vu4) created in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions cannot be opened in Vers. 1, 2 or 3.
To open in VT STUDIO Ver. 2 or Ver. 3, save the file as (*.vs2, *.vu2, *.vs3, or *.vu3).

Point The following data created in VT STUDIO Ver.2, Ver.3 or Ver.4 or later versions cannot be
opened in Ver. 1.
• Data sent from PC to VT
• The image data written into the memory card

x VT->PC data receive О PC->VT data transimt


VT3 Series/
VT2 Series
VT STUDIO Ver.1 VT STUDIO Ver.4 or later, Ver.3, Ver.2
(*.vs1, *.vu1) (*.vs4, *.vu4, *.vs3, *.vu3, *.vs2, *.vu2)

x Read from Memory Card Ο Written into Memory


Card
Memory Card
(VTEDT*.ms4, ms3, ms2)
VT STUDIO Ver.1 VT STUDIO Ver.4 or later,
(Autoload.ms4, ms3, ms2)
Ver.3, Ver.2
(VTEDT*.md4)

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-7


1-3 About the Shift JIS and UNICODE Versions

About the Shift JIS and UNICODE Versions


1 Shift-JIS version and UNICODE version are available for VT STUDIO Ver.3 or lower.
VT STUDIO Ver.4 or higher is the UNICODE version.
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

OS VT STUDIO version to be installed


Windows98SE/Me Shift JIS version
Windows 10/8/7/Vista/XP (SP3 or later) UNICODE version

 Data compatibility for Shift JIS version and UNICODE version


• The VTS files created with the UNICODE version contain Chinese and Korean characters etc. Messy codes may occur
when they are opened with the Shift JIS version.
• VT STUDIO can also read the English VT2 files created by VT2 BUILDER. In the case of the Shift JIS version,
however, Messy codes may occur to the Chinese and Korean, for example, characters.

1-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-4 Operating Environment
This section describes the environments required for operating VT STUDIO as follows.
Make sure that the system that you are using meets the following conditions and that you have all of the required
equipments.
1
Operating Environment for VT-H7J (Japanese Version) and VT-H7G (Global version)

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


Item Operating Environment
Supported OS* Windows 10/8 (including 8.1)/7/Vista (SP2 or later)/XP (SP3 or later)
VT-H7J (Japanese version): 3 GB or more
Free space on hard disk
VT-H7G (Global version): 7 GB or more
1024 x 768 dots or higher
Display
High color (16-bit) or higher
DVD drive Required for installation
Interface USB port, RS-232C port, Ethernet port
* Windows Vista/XP OSs are compatible with 32-bit version only.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-9


1-5 Installation of VT STUDIO
This section describes how to install VT STUDIO to your PC's hard disk.

1 Preparion for installation


BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

Check the following before installing VT2 BUILDER.

Point We recommend to backup DVD master disk in case it is damaged.

Free space on hard disk


VT STUDIO can only be installed on a hard disk. The following amount of free space on the hard disk is required for
installation.
• VT-H7J (Japanese version): 3 GB or more
• VT-H7G (Global version): 7 GB or more
Windows environment and installation destination
VT STUDIO operates on Windows.
VT STUDIO also executed on Windows.
Make sure that Windows has been installed into your PC and can operate normally.

Precautions for Installation

 User Privileges
To use VT STUDIO, It is necessary to get the following rights.
For Windows other than XP: "Standard User" or above
For Windows XP: "Power User" or above

 Installation Destination Folders


The following folders excluding those specified as installation destination can also be created by VT STUDIO.

 Auto backup files


For Windows other than XP: C:\Users\<User's name>\Documents\KEYENCE\VTS4E*
For Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\<User's name>\Documents\KEYENCE\VTS4E*
* For VT-H7G (Global version), this differs according to the display language setting. The folder for each language is
as follows.
Japanese: "\VTS4", English: "\VTS4E", Chinese: "\VTS4C"

 Part catalog (user-defined)/Screen examples/UserStyle files


For Windows other than XP: C:\Users\All Users\Documents\KEYENCE\VTS4E*
For Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\KEYENCE\VTS4E*
* For VT-H7G (Global version), this differs according to the display language setting. The folder for each language is
as follows.
Japanese: "\VTS4", English: "\VTS4E", Chinese: "\VTS4C"

 Precautions for Uninstallation


When uninstalling VT STUDIO, a dialog box for selecting whether or not to delete the files (*.dll) used by VT STUDIO
is displayed sometimes.
Mark the "Don't display this message again" checkbox and click the "Yes" button. Windows operation will not be
affected even if these files are deleted.

1-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-5 Installation of VT STUDIO

How to Install
The following describes how to install into PC by taking the configuration of the following drives as examples. 1
If the driver letters in your current PC differ from the following, specify the drive to install the software according to the

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


actual PC configuration.
C drive: Hard disk drive
E drive: DVD drive

1 Turn the PC ON, and start Windows.


Exit any application that is already started up.

Point Only the user with "Administrator" right can log in.

2 Insert "VT STUDIO system disk (disk1)" into the DVD on the PC.
The installation program is started with the autorun function on PC.
Otherwise, select the "Run" in the Start menu and enter "e:\Startup.exe" in the "Run" dialog box, then click "OK".

Items Description
VT STUDIO Ver.7G Install VT STUDIO Ver.7G
Remote COM Port Tool
Install Remote COM Port Tool Ver.5G and Remote Ethernet Too l G *1.
Ver.5G

*1 The Remote Ethernet Tool supports VT5 Series only.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-11


1-5 Installation of VT STUDIO

Installing VT STUDIO

1  Installation of VT STUDIO
1
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

Click "Install" to start installation.


To cancel installation, click the "Cancel" button.

Reference When installing VT-H7G (Global version), you will be asked to select the language in which to install
VT STUDIO.
Select a language (Japanese, English or Chinese (simplified)) and click "OK".

2 After reading the contents of License Agreement, select "Agree Terms of License Agreement(A)" and click "Next(N)>"

3 Check installation destination, and click "Next(N)>".


VT STUDIO will be installed in the following location if the installation destination is not changed.
VT-H7J (Japanese version) : "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\VTS7J"
VT-H7G (Global version) : "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\VTS7G"
To change the installation destination, click "Change (C)" and specify a location.

4 When asked whether to install the Clip Art Illustration into the hard disk, click "Yes" if necessary.
Click "No(N)", and go to step 5.
In addition, even if the Clip Art Illustration is not installed, you can still use it by directly referring to DVD.

1-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-5 Installation of VT STUDIO

5 Check the settings, and click "Next(N)>".


To change the settings, click "Back(B)".

1
6 Visualize the copying status of files.

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


7 Visualize the copying status of files of Clip Art Illustration.

8 Click "Finish" after finish message is displayed.

So far, the installation of VT STUDIO is finished.


The following screen will be displayed when "Remote COM Port Tool" is selected via "Standard" or "Custom" of
installation program.

Click the [OK] button to continue installing the remote communication port.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-13


1-5 Installation of VT STUDIO

Install Remote COM Port Tool

1 The Remote COM Port Tools (Remote COM Port Tool and Remote Ethernet Tool) will be installed if you selected
"Remote communication port tools" in the installation program.
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

1 Click "Next(N)>" to start installation.


To cancel installation, click the "Cancel" button.

2 Check the installation destination, and click "Next(N)>".


The Remote COM Port Tool will be installed in the following location if the installation destination is not changed.
VT-H7J (Japanese version) : "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\RCP5"
VT-H7G (Global version) : "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\RCP5G"
To change the installation destination, click "Change (C)" and specify a location.

3 The copy status of Remote COM Port Tool files is displayed in a graph.

4 Click "Finish" after finish message is displayed.


Remote COM Port Tool is now successfully installed.

1-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-6 Installation of USB Driver
The environments required for operating VT STUDIO are as follows.
Make sure that the used system meets the following conditions and that you have all of the required equipments.

1
Precautions When Using USB

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


• Instead of the USB hub, USB driver can be directly connected to the USB port on PC. In some cases,
communication may be interrupted due to noise or other unfavorable communication conditions. Re-plug the USB
cable when communication is interrupted.
• For unfavorable communication conditions such as too strong noise, be sure to roll the cable around a ferrite.
• Installation is unnecessary when VT2 series USB driver is already installed.

Install USB Driver in Windows 10/8/7/Vista


During VT3 connection, the USB driver is installed automatically.

Install USB driver in Windows XP


Connect VT3 to a PC installed with Windows XP. The USB driver for VT3 must be installed only when VT3 is
connected for the first time. For the conditions afterwards, it is unnecessary to install USB driver due to automatic
recognization.

Point Be sure to install VT STUDIO before installing USB driver.

1 Start up Windows XP, and log in as an Administrator, computer administrator or a user having rights for
changing system settings.

2 Connect the USB port on VT3 to the USB port on PC with a USB cable.
"New hardware found" is displayed, and the “Add Hardware Wizard“ is displayed.

When using Windows XP Service Pack3, select "No, don't connect this time" radio button, and click "Next(N)>"
button.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-15


1-6 Installation of USB Driver

3 Select "Install from a list or specific location "radio button and click "Next(N)>" button.

1
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

4 Select the "Search for the best driver in these locations", and check the "Include the following location:"
checkbox. Next, enter "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\VTS7G\VT3\USB" and click "Next(N)>" button.

Point "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\VTS7G" in this step is the directory where VT STUDIO was
installed. Rewrite this directory according to the operating environment.

5 Click "Continue (C)" button.

1-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-6 Installation of USB Driver

Installation is started.

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


6 Click "Finish" button.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-17


1-6 Installation of USB Driver

MEMO

1
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

1-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2 2

SCREENS & WINDOWS


SCREENS & WINDOWS
This chapter describes the configuration of the Edit window and screens, and
restrictions when making screens.

2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens ••••••••••• 2-2


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens •••••••••••••••••• 2-14

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-1


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Edit Window
The following describes the VT STUDIO Edit window.

2 Title bar Menu bar Edit window Tool bar


SCREENS & WINDOWS

Tool bar

Workspace
(Screen/system setting/
device comment list )

Tool bar

Status bar Search result list/text string list/ Catalog window


operating log list Property window

Item Description
Displays the name of the currently open file and type (page No., global window No., printer form
Title bar
No., base/window) of screen.
Menu bar Displays the menu.
Tool bar Displays available tools. Faintly displayed tools are currently unavailable functions.
Displays the screen currently being edited. Parts, device No. display and label display can also
be placed outside of this display frame (green area). Fully exposed parts (excluding memo and
Edit window
Animation display) are not sent to VT3 and memory card as display data . (not displayed in
VT3, nor saved into memory card).
To display the part catalog/screen catalog file selected. This can be configured in the Edit
Catalog window window by dragging and dropping (press and hold the left key of the mouse and move the
cursor to the desired position, then release the left key).
Displays the key state and a description of the function.
Status bar
When an object is selected, its type, position, size and label are also displayed.
The following operations are possible on the
"Screen" tab:
• Viewing the configuration of screens made
for each page
• Making new screens
Workspace
• New form screen
The following operations are possible on the
"System Settings" tab:
• VT system settings • Trend graph system settings
• Editing alarm system settings and alarm details • Editing messages
• Registered character of Windows font • Setting of device sending
• Editing PLC Data Folder Data • Worksheet System Settings
The property window is displayed when a part is selected, and is used for setting graphic
Property window
attributes and for setting the nameplate and style of switches/lamps.
Search result list The list shows the search results.
Text string list The list shows the text strings used in parts.
Device comment list The list shows the read-in device comment.
Operating log list The list shows the read-in operating log.

2-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Customizing edit window


Display the position of tool bar, workspace, catalog and search result list, etc, by dragging and dropping. Try placing
the tool bar at various positions to find which position is easiest to use.
Item Configurable position
Menu bar
Tool bar
• On screens as a window
• Top, bottom, left and right of edit screen 2
Workspace

SCREENS & WINDOWS


Part catalog
Screen catalog
Property window
• On screens as a window
• Top, bottom, left and right of edit screen
Search result list • Top, bottom, left and right of edit screen
Text string list
Device comment list
Operating log list

Reference The displayed tool bar icon can be selected.

Docking navigator
If dragging the windows of workspace, catalog and search result lists during self-defining of edit screen,the docking
navigator for designating the configuration site will be displayed.
If dragging and dropping on the docking navigator, the window is combined with the designated position.
Type of docking navigator Description

Displayed at top, bottom, left and right of edit screen.


If dragging on these tabs, it is combined with top, bottom, left and right of edit screen.

Displayed at the location of cursor.


For example, when the cursor is on workspace,
If dragging on the tabs of top, bottom, left and right, itís combined with top, bottom, left and
right of workspace.
If dragging on the central tab, it is combined with workspace, and displayed as label.
Dragging and dropping the label during separation.

Autohide
The workspace, catalog and search result lists are only displayed where necessary.
Click the toggle icon shown on top right corner when combined with workspace, catalog and search result lists on top,
bottom, left and right of edit screen.
Icon Description

Workspace, catalog and search result lists maintain original state.

Workspace, catalog and search result lists are shown as labels on top, bottom, left and
right of edit screen. Just move the mouse onto the label, or click the label for display.

Point Attribute window can not be hided automatically.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-3


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Origin, X-axis and Y-axis in Edit window


The origin, X-axis and Y-axis of the Edit window is shown as follows. The top left corner of the display frame (in the
default setting, the black area by default) is the origin (0,0).

Horizontal (regular) screen


2 Origin X-axis direction
SCREENS & WINDOWS

Horizontal (regular) VT3 display area


Y-axis direction

screen display frame

POWER indicator

Vertical screen

Origin X-axis direction


Y-axis direction

Vertical screen VT3 display area


display frame

POWER indicator

Coordinate range of display frame in X- and Y-axes


Type X-axis Coordinate Range Y-axis Coordinate Range
Horizontal screen 0 to 1023 0 to 767
VT3-X15
Vertical screen 0 to 767 0 to 1023
Horizontal screen 0 to 799 0 to 599
VT3-S12/S10
Vertical screen 0 to 599 0 to 799
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/ Horizontal screen 0 to 639 0 to 479
V6H(G) Vertical screen 0 to 479 0 to 639
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/ Horizontal screen 0 to 319 0 to 239
Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/
Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A Vertical screen 0 to 239 0 to 319

VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/ Horizontal screen 0 to 319 0 to 127


W4G (A) Vertical screen 0 to 127 0 to 319

Point • The POWER lamp of VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/V7R is on the top right of the landscape screen
(normal).
• There is no POWER indicator for VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A).
• For VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A), the power terminals on back are downward.

2-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Screen Configuration
Screens made using VT STUDIO are managed by page No.
Each page comprises the base screen and window screen (local window), each of which is saved separately. There
is also a window screen (global window) that does not belong to a page, and that is separate from the base screen
and the window screen.
2
There is also a printer form screen that is exclusively for printing forms that is not displayed on VT3 in addition to the

SCREENS & WINDOWS


regular screens (base/window).

Configuration of pages (base, window)


Page Nos. can be set within the range 0 to 8999. However, note that the maximum number of pages that can be
created is 1024, and 9000 pages' worth of data cannot actually be created. However, note that the maximum number
of pages that can be created is 1024, and 9000 pages' worth of data cannot actually be created.
Each page comprises four screens: a base and local windows (window 1, window 2, window 3). There is also a
global window that does not belong to the page and can be displayed on any page.

Page 0 Page 1 Page 8999

Base Base Base


Window 1 Window 1 Window 1
Window 2 Window 2 Window 2
Window 3 Window 3 Window 3

Display is possible on any page.


Global window

G000
G001

G999

Numeric keypads, keyboards, etc., can be used in common on multiple pages by placing them in the global window.

Base screen and window screens


A "base screen" is the screen that is always displayed when that page is switched to.
A "window screen" is the screen that is displayed overlapping the base screen. Window screens are used for
displaying numeric keypads or keyboard entry screens overlapping the base screen.

Base screen Window screen Base screen + window screen

Target @0000_1 Target @0000_1

1234 1234

9876 9876

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-5


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Local windows and global windows


Local windows (windows 1 to 3) are windows that can be displayed only on certain pages. Where as global windows
do not belong to a specific page, and can be displayed on any page.
Up to eight global windows (global windows ID 0 to 7) can be displayed on a single page.

2 Note, however, that eight screens sometimes cannot be displayed simultaneously depending on the size of the
screen data and other restrictions.
Screens in global windows can be swapped.
SCREENS & WINDOWS

Though global window numbers can be set within the range G000 to G999, the number of screens that can actually
be made fluctuates depending on the relationship between the size of each screen data and VT3 memory capacity.
"Number of screens that can be made", page 2-8
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"

[Example] To change the display of global window ID0 currently displayed from global window No.G000 to
G010.

Global window ID0 (global window No.G000) is currently displayed.



Global window is displayed by a switch.
(Set so that ID is the same 0, and global window No. specification is different.)

The screen content of the already displayed global window is switched.
(global window No.G000 changes to No.G010)

Switch: Global window display ON


Global window ID0
Global window No.G010

Global window ID0 Global window ID0


Global window No.G000 Global window No.G010
Displayed Displayed

Point • When many parts (switches/lamps, basic parts, graphs/meters, etc.) that read devices on
the PLC are placed on a global window, updating (display refreshing) of these parts slows
down. When making a screen in which many parts are placed, use base and local
windows.
• When unit monitor and device monitor are displayed in global window, the followings are
used through special operation of main screen:
• Software monitor: Global window ID6;
• Device monitor: ID7; Global window ID7
VT3 Series Hardware Manual "Chapter 5 System Mode"

2-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Printer form screen


A "Printer Form Screen" is a screen exclusively for printing forms, and is not displayed on the VT3. Draw the details
to be printed in advance in the same way as for a regular screen (base/window). When the print start trigger bit turns
ON, the printer form screen is printed.
"11-5 Form Printing"
2
Printer form screen

SCREENS & WINDOWS


P00 P01 P15

Printer form screens can be set within the range from page No.P00 to P15.
However, note that the number of screens that can actually be made
fluctuates depending on the relationship between the size of each screen
data and VT3 memory capacity.
"Screen data", page 2-16

Point Form screen can not be created by VT3-W4T(A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A).

Screen ID
A "screen ID" is an individual name that is set to the base screen, window screen, and printer form screen.
When a new screen is made, the following defaults are automatically assigned to the screen:
Base/local windows
Base: B
@0000_B Window 1㧦1
Window 2㧦2
Window 3㧦3
Page No.

Global window

@G000_W
Global window No.

Printer form screen

@Pn00_P
Page No.

[Example] Automatically assigned screen ID


Base screen of page 0 -> @0000_B
Window 2 screen of page 5 -> @0005_2
Global window screen having global window No.G000 -> @G000_W
Printer form screen of page No.P15 -> @Pn15_P
Screen IDs can be changed as desired. Change the screen ID by one of the following methods:
• By selecting “Edit(E)” -> “Screen attribute settings(M)” from Menu in that order
• By selecting the screen whose screen ID you want to change on the “Screen” tab in the workspace, and either
select “Screen attribute settings” from menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button, or click the button
to open the “Screen attribute settings” window
• By double-clicking the screen to change at the “Screen” tab in the workspace
"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18
"Workspace", page 5-15
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-7
2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Number of screens that can be made

Max. Number of Screens


Screen Page (window) Setting Range
that can be Created*
Base 0 to 8999 1024
2 Local window
Global window
Windows 1 to 3 on each base
G000 to G999
1024x3=3072
1000
Total 1024
screens
Printer form screen*2 P00 to P15 16
SCREENS & WINDOWS

*1 The maximum number of screens that can be created is 1024 (bases + local windows + global windows + printer
form screens). (For example, if 1024 base screens are created, window screens and printer form screens cannot
be created.). However, the number of screens that can be created varies depending on the size of each screen
data and VT3 memory capacity.
"Screen data", page 2-16
*2 Form screen can not be created by VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A).

Reference Number of screens that could be made on VT1


Max. Number of Screens
Base, Window Page (window) Setting Range
that can be Created*
Base 0 to 8999 256
Window (window 1, 2, 3) Windows 1 to 3 on each base 256x3=768

* The maximum number of screens that could be made on VT1 was 1024 (bases + windows (1 to 3)).
However, that the number of screens that could be made fluctuated depending on the size of each
screen data and VT1 memory capacity.

Screen size
The screen size is fixed to the VT3 screen size, and cannot be changed.
The size of windows (local and global) can be changed within the allowable range of the VT3 screen size.
Grid size of switch can be changed as follows.
VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8/V7/V7R/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A: 16 x 16 dot
VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A): 8 x 8 dot
The size of printer forms is determined by the printer model setting.
"11-5 Form Printing"

Window (local, global) size change ranges

Title bar Minimum Maximum


None 32 (W) x 32 (H) dots
VT3 screen size in both V and H
Size of title bar: standard 32 (W) x 48 (H) dots
ON directions
Size of title bar: big 64 (W) x 64 (H) dots

Minimum window (local, global) sizes

W/out title bar W/ title bar (standard) W/ title bar (large)

@0000_1

64 dots
Title bar 48 dots Title bar
32 dots

32 dots 32 dots 64 dots

Window frame display space of 1 dot in width is required around the window.
In the case of 3D frame displays, a display space of 3 dots in width is required.

2-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Resizing window screens and moving screen positions


Window screens can be resized.

SCREENS & WINDOWS


Move the cursor to the side of the window frame. A thick pink frame is displayed.
Click the cursor when it changes to the hand cursor. When the cursor turns into arrow during moving the
cursor on the frame, change the size or position of
window screen by dragging.

: Resizes screens in the vertical direction. The cursor changes to this when you move it to roughly the center
of the thick pink frame.
: Resizes screens in the horizontal direction. The cursor changes to this when you move it to roughly the
center of the thick pink frame.
: Resizes screens in the vertical and horizontal directions. The cursor changes to this when you move it to
roughly the corner of the thick pink frame.
: Changes the position of the window screen. The cursor changes to this when you move it on the window
frame.

Switching base screens (switching pages)

Method Base
Touch switch • Switch
• System Memory Area
PLC ladder program • Function control by devices
• global function control
Alarm message option settings • Alarm display

"8-2 Setting Switches"


"Chapter 14 SYSTEM MEMORY AREA"
"14-4 PLC-Based Page Switching"
"Alarm System Settings", page 9-82

Reference Page switching is possible even while the following functions are executing
• Saving recorded data to Memory Card (alarm logs, trend graph data)
• Saving to operating log memory card
• Saving worksheet data to memory card
• PLC data folders (transferring comments)
• BMP file switching
• Form printing

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-9


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Point Operation sometimes differs depending on the conditions when page switching is executed
by the following methods.
Switch Check : When page is switched by touch switch
PLC : When page is switched by PLC through functional control and Global function

2 Touch switch / PLC


control of system memory area or devices
: When page is switched by touch switch or PLC

• When there are parts with On switch (the cross-key specifying switch, display switch, key
SCREENS & WINDOWS

entry parts and switch functions are not released) (including OFF delay of switch
expansion function)
Touch switch / PLC : Page switching is held and automatically performed after completion of
operation.
• When there is a switch (momentary reset) (at a slow communications speed) for which OFF
has not been executed
Touch switch / PLC : Page switching is held and automatically performed after completion of
operation.
• When multiple functions (ticket printing, hard copy, alarm log printing, and video
capturing) are requested at the same time and the requirements are not processed yet,
printing or video capturing is performed.
Switch Check : Page switching is impossible before startup of printing or writing to
memory card (display “SW switching page inhibited”).
PLC : Page switching is held and automatically performed before startup of
printing or writing to memory card. While page switching is pending,
operations by touch switches are not possible.

Example 1 When a video capture request arrives during form printing


Switch Check : Page switching is impossible before writing to memory card by video capture
(display “SW switching page inhibited”).
PLC : Page switching is held and automatically performed before writing to memory
card by video capture.

Example 2 When a hard copy request arrives during a hard copy


Switch Check : Pages cannot be switched until printing of the 2nd hard copy is started ("Cannot
change page" is displayed).
PLC : Page switching is made pending until printing of the 2nd hard copy is started, after
which page switching is automatically executed.

Window (local, global) screens and title bar


Window screens can be provided with a title bar.
Setting the title bar
"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18

Move Screen ID Move to front Close

@0000_1

Window screen

Three operations become possible when a title bar is provided.

2-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Moving windows
Press the touch switch for "Move", then touch the screen at the position that needs to be moved.

@0000_1

@0000_1 @0000_1 2

SCREENS & WINDOWS


The title bar blinks when the While the title bar is flashing, touch The window moves to the move
"Move" touch switch is touched. the screen at the position that needs destination.
to be moved.

Swapping the overlapping order of windows


The overlapping order of windows can be swapped by touching the "move to front" touch switch.

@0000_1 @0000_1

Touch the "Move to front" The window moves to the front.


touch switch.

Point Either local window or global window can be switched.

Reference On the VT1, only the overlapping order of windows 1 and 2 could be swapped. Window 3 was fixed to
be displayed at the front at all times.

Closing windows
The "Close" button can be set so as not to be displayed in the screen attribute settings.
Setting the "Close" button
"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18

@0000_1

Touch the "Close" touch switch. The window closes.

Point The "Close" button is not displayed in interrupt windows.


Interrupt Window
"Displaying the window 3 interrupt window", page 2-12

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-11


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Displaying the window 3 interrupt window


Interrupt windows can be displayed only in window 3.
"Interrupt window display" is a function for displaying the window 3 screen having the page No. specified to the VT3
by the PLC ladder program.
Even if the window 3 screen for a currently displayed page No. is already displayed, the window 3 screen for the
2 specified page No. is displayed on the VT3.
"14-6 Displaying Interrupt Windows by PLCs"
SCREENS & WINDOWS

Reference On the VT1, when the window 3 screen for the currently displayed page No. was displayed, display was
canceled, and the VT1 was forcibly interrupted with the window 3 screen for the specified page No.
Display of window 3 displayed as the interrupt window can be turned OFF only from the
Point
system memory area.
Display cannot be turned OFF from switches or function controls by devices.

Window screen display ON/OFF

Method Local window Global window Interrupt Window


Display ON Enable Enable
Touch switch Disable
Display OFF • Switch • Switch
Display ON Enable
Enable
PLC Ladder program
• System Memory Area • Function control by devices Enable
Display OFF • Function control by devices • Global function control • System Memory Area
• Global function control
Touch numerical value
Display ON Enable Enable Disable
display/text display
Disable Disable
Initial display during page (The screen currently (The screen currently
Enable
switching Display ON displayed on the previous displayed on the previous
(screen attribute settings)
page can be displayed also page can be displayed also
after page switching.) after page switching.)
Display contents Disable Enable Enable
switching of window screen - (Screen content of windows 1 to 3 is fixed.) (Global window is changed.) (Change insertion windowNo.)
Alarm message option settings Display ON Enable Enable Disable

Reference The following functions enable ON/OFF of window display even during execution.
• Saving recorded data to Memory Card (alarm logs, trend graph data)
• Saving to operating log memory card
• Saving worksheet data to memory card
• PLC data folders (transferring comments)
• BMP file switching
• Form printing
Operation sometimes differs depending on the conditions when window display ON/OFF is
Point
executed by the following methods:
Touch Switch : When a window display is turned ON/OFF by a touch switch
PLC : When the window displays ON/OFF from PLC through functional control and
Global function control of system memory area or devices;
Touch switch/PLC : The window displays ON/OFF by touch switch or PLC

• When there are parts with On switch (the cross-key specifying switch, display switch, key
entry parts and switch functions are not released) (including OFF delay of switch
expansion function)
Touch switc / PLC : Window ON/OFF display is held and automatically performed after
completion of operation.
• When there is a switch (momentary reset) (at a slow communications speed) for which OFF
has not been executed
Touch switch/PLC : Window ON/OFF display is held and automatically performed after
completion of operation.
• When simultaneous execution of multiple functions (form printing, hard copy, printing of
alarm logs, video capture) is requested, and there is a print execution (hard copy, printing
of alarm log) or video capture during unprocessed requests
Touch Switch : Window displays cannot be turned ON/OFF until printing is started or
writing to Memory Card is started ("Cannot change window" is
displayed).
PLC : Window display ON/OFF is made pending until printing is started or
writing to Memory Card is started, after which window display ON/OFF is
automatically executed. While window display ON/OFF is pending,
operations by touch switches are not possible.
2-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Example 1 When a video capture request arrives during form printing


Touch Switch : Window ON/OFF display is impossible before writing to memory card by video
capture (display “SW switching window disabled”).
PLC : Window ON/OFF display is held and automatically performed before writing to
memory card by video capture.

Example 2 When a hard copy request arrives during a hard copy 2


Touch Switch : Window display ON/OFF is not possible until printing of the 2nd hard copy is

SCREENS & WINDOWS


started ("Window switching by switches is disabled" is displayed).
PLC : Window display ON/OFF is made pending until printing of the 2nd hard copy is
started, after which window display ON/OFF is automatically executed.

Number of windows that can be displayed in a single page

Local Window Global Window Interrupt Window Total (max.)


3 8 1 12

Point • Global windows sometimes cannot be displayed due to restrictions in the number of
devices, screen data size, number of key entry parts, overlapping data, and other factors.
To display multiple global windows simultaneously, thoroughly check operation on an
actual working unit.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"
Global window Nofity error
"Other", page 12-31
• When opening “insert window display” during global window display process, the
followings are shown if exceeding the number of devices, screen data capacity, number of
key-entry parts and repetitive data capacity.
• The display of all currently displayed global windows turns OFF, and display of the
interrupt window turns ON.
• The states of local windows (windows 1 to 3) do not change.
• The notify bit device for notifying global window errors turns ON.

Window screen overlapping rules


When the "Initial display" checkbox is not marked in the window settings of the screen attribute settings, screens are
displayed overlapping the base in the order that display was turned ON.
When the "Initial display" checkbox is marked in the window settings of the screen attribute settings, the local
windows are displayed overlapping the base in order Window 1, Window 2, and Window 3 immediately after page
switching.
The global window and interrupt window are displayed overlapping the base in the order that display turned ON.

Reference On the VT1, if display of window 3 was turned ON when the "Initial display" checkbox was not marked
in the window settings of the screen attribute settings, window 3 was displayed fixed at the front at all
times, and window 1 and window 2 were displayed overlapping the base in the order that display was
turned ON.
If the "Initial display" checkbox was marked in the window settings of the screen attribute settings,
window 1, window 2 and window 3 were displayed overlapping the base in that order immediately
after page switching.

Screen Management
Screens that you have made are saved to a single file categorized by base screen, local window screen, global
window screen, and printer form screen.
Used when it is possible to copy to the screen created on other pages, or import into the screen of other VTS/VT2 files.
Screens that you have made can also be copied to or deleted from workspace.
"Workspace", page 5-15

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-13


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Point For the restrictions when creating VT2 series screen, refer to “VT2 Series Reference
Manual”.

2 Restrictions in the Number of Pages and Number of Screens


The number of pages and number of screens restrictions are as follows:
SCREENS & WINDOWS

Page setting range : Page 0 to 8999


Global window No. setting range : G000 to G999
Printer form setting range : P00 to P15
Maximum number of pages : 1024
Maximum number of screens : 1024
(sum of base, local window, global window and form screen)

Point The maximum number of pages that can be created is 1024, and 9000 pages' worth of data
cannot actually be made. The number of screens that can be created sometime is lower than
1024, depending upon data capacity and VT3 memory capacity of different screens.
VT3 memory capacity
"Screen data", page 2-16

Restrictions

Single-page restrictions
The following table shows the restrictions that apply to devices and control objects that can be set in individual pages.
For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow.
Item Total of Base + Local Window Total of Global Window, Interrupt Window
Reference data Max. 2048 devices Max. 1024 devices
PLC devices Max.1536 (including system device) Max. 768 devices
Number of control
Max. 1024 devices Max. 512 devices
objects
Key entry parts Max. 256 devices Max. 256 devices
Overlapping data Max. 48 Kbytes Max. 48 Kbytes
Screen data Max. 128 Kbytes Max. 64 Kbytes

Point • Repetitive data capacity contains repetitive data capacity for position control (graphics
attribute control and Animation display).
• System devices indicate the devices set in “System Setting of VT Series”, “System Setting
of Trend Graph”, “System Setting of Alarming”, “System Setting of Worksheet”, “Form
Screen (Trigger Bit Device for Printing)”, “Global Function Control” and “Device Transfer”.
However, the “Number of Devices” excludes the trend sampling device of expansion trend
and alarming detection device of expansion alarm.

2-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Printer form restrictions


The following table shows the restrictions that apply to devices and control objects that can be set in individual pages.
For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow.
Item Restrictions in Single Printer Form Page
Reference data
PLC device
Max. 1024 devices
Max. 768 devices
2
Number of control objects Max. 512 devices

SCREENS & WINDOWS


Screen data Max. 64 Kbytes

Single-screen restrictions
Item Max. number
Overlapping objects 192
Indirect reference devices 64

Restrictions on global function control/global function switch


Item Total
Data volume referenced Up to 384
Number of PLC devices Up to 384
Number of control objects Up to 64
Screen data volume Max 16KB

Number of control objects


The following objects are counted as control objects when they are placed on a screen.
Objects Number of control objects
Screen data header 4
Printer form data header 0
Graphic attribute controls (blink, display, plane attribute, line
(number of controls +1)
attribute, text attribute, position control)
When there is 1 switch function 1 image
Switch, lamp switch
When there are multiple switch functions (number of switch functions +1)
Lamp, N state lamp
Switch extended function
Numerical display, Text display, Message display, Alarm display,
Video display, 1
Animation display
Meter (bar, pie and fan), statistical chart (bar, pie)
Functional control via device; BMP file replacement; XYgraph
When there is no scale (outer) 1
Trend Graph
When there is a scale (outer) 2
N state parts (numerical value display, text display) (number of parts +1)
N state parts (switches/lamps) (total of (1) to (5))*1
Function switch (8+(7))*3
Cross-key (4+(6))*2

*1 The following calculation is performed on multiple switches/lamps (switches, lamp switches, lamps) that are
set to N state parts.
(1) 1
(2) Number of lamp parts x 1
(3) Number of parts (switches, lamp switches) with switch extended functions x 1
(4) Number of parts (switches, lamp switches) having one switch function x 1
(5) For switches and lamp switches having two or more switch functions, total of (number of switch functions +
1) objects for each part
*2 (6) Sum of switch functions set at top, bottom, left and right
*3 (7) Total number of switch functions setup in 8 function switches.
The number of control object can be confirmed through “Resource(R)”-> “Data check(D)”-> “Current page(P)”.
"12-9 Data Check"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-15


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Key Entry Parts


The following basic parts and meters/graphs become key entry parts when the "Key entry" checkbox on the “Key
entry” tab of the basic parts and meters/graphs settings is marked.

Numerical display, Text display, Message display, Alarm display, Trend graph, XYgraph

2
SCREENS & WINDOWS

The number of key entry objects can be confirmed by “Resources(R)” -> “Data check(D)” -> “Current page(P)”.
"12-9 Data Check"

Overlapping data
When objects are placed overlapping on the screen, data for identifying and drawing overlapping of objects is generated.
The size of overlapping data can be confirmed by “Resources(R)” -> “Data check(D)” -> “Current page(P)” or “All
data(A)”.
"12-9 Data Check"

Screen data
The size of VT3 screen data varies according to whether or not addon memory (OP42253) is mounted.
Model Without Addon Memory With Addon Memory (16 Mbytes)
VT3-X15 28 Mbytes 44 Mbytes
VT3-S12/S10/V10 12 Mbytes 28 Mbytes
VT3-V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) 12 Mbytes -*1
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/
Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A 4 Mbytes -*1

VT-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) 3 Mbytes -*1


*1 VT3-V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A)
cannot increase memory(OP-42253).
The size of screen data can be confirmed by “Resources(R)” -> “Data check(D)” -> “Current page(P)” or “All data(A)”.
"12-9 Data Check"
• Single-page and single-screen restrictions are checked when the following operations are
Point
performed:
(1) When "Communications" -> "PC -> VT Send data(S)" -> "All data(A)" or "Screen
data(S)" are selected in that order, and the data is sent to the VT3
(2) When "File(F)" -> "Memory Card(M)" -> "Write to Memory Card(W)" is selected in that
order, and data is written to the Memory Card or file
(3) When "Resources(R)" -> "Data check(D)" -> "Current page(P)" or "All data(A)" are
selected in that order, and the data check is performed
If an error occurs in the data check, a corresponding error message is displayed.
"1 Error Message Lists", page A-2
Screens can be made even if restrictions are exceeded if an operation other than the above
is performed.
• The size of screen data decreases as worksheet setting data is saved as part of the screen
data.
"16-1 About Worksheets"
2-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Number of devices, number of lookup data


Devices (numerical values, PLC devices, indirect references, calculations, cells) are counted as shown in the
following table when they are set.
Objects Number of Devices *1 Reference data

Screen (base window)


Basic
When notify bit device in Notify screen switching is ON
0
+1
0
+1
2
When write default word in Notify screen switching is ON +Write words +1

SCREENS & WINDOWS


Screen (printer form) 0 0
Basic 1 2
When Switch mode is Reverse bit +2 0
Lamp switch When Switch mode is Set Momentary 0 0
When Switch mode is other than the above +1 0
When Blink by bit is ON +1 +1
Basic 1 1
Lamp
When Blink by bit is ON +1 +1
When Switch mode is set Momentaryt 0 1
Set bit When Switch mode is Reverse bit 2 1
When Switch mode is other than the above 1 1
Page When Page switching bit set is OFF 0 0
switching When Page switching bit set is ON 1 1
When Switch mode is set data When Data length is 1 word 1
2
When Data length is 2 words *2 2
Set word
When Switch mode is other When Data length is 1 word 2
than the above 3
When Data length is 2 words *2 4
When Data length is 1 word 2
Set digits 2
Switch When Data length is 2 words *2 4

When ASCII/shift JIS is set *3 Number of text


Set text string bytes /2+1
string 1
When UNICODE is set *3 Number of
characters+1*5
Extended Basic 0 0
command
communicati When setting up command *11 *12
on
Other than
the above 0 0

Switch When Interlock is OFF 0 0


extension When Interlock is ON 1 1
When Specify mode is Word device 1 1
N state lamp
When Specify mode is Bit device Number of states 1
When Specify mode is Word device 1 1
N state parts *4
When Specify mode is Bit device Number of states 1
Basic 0 0
Function switch
When switch at top, bottom, left and right is set. +(*8) +(*9)
Basic 0 0
Cross-key
When switch at top, bottom, left and right is set. +(*8) +(*9)
Basic 0 0
Blink control +1 +1
Display control +1 +1
Line attribute control +1 +1
Graphic attribute
Plane attribute control +1 +1
controls
Text attribute control +1 +1
Position control (XY-axis) +2 +2
Position control (X-axis/Y-axis) +1 +1
Position control (specify point) +1 +1

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-17


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Reference
Objects Number of Devices *1 data
When Data length is 1 word 1
Basic 3
When Data length is 2 words *2 2
When Data length is 1 word +2
2
When input range is set at non-
numerical. 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
With key input, but without setting When Data length is 1 word +1
change notification +1
When Data length is 2 words *2
SCREENS & WINDOWS

+2
Numerical When Data length is 1 word
value With key input
When Notify changes to settings is ON 0 +1
display When Data length is 2 words *2
When Data length is 1 word +2
When Display range is ON 2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Data length is 1 word +2
When Alarm range is ON +2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Enable changes to settings is ON +1 +1
When Notify changes to settings is ON 0 +1
When ASCII/shift JIS is set Number of text string bytes/2+1
Basic 1
When UNICODE is set Number of characters+1 *5
When Key entry/Barcode When ASCII/shift JIS is set +(Number of text string bytes/2+1)
entry is ON and Notify +1
changes to settings is OFF When UNICODE is set +(Character data+1)*5
Text When Key entry/Barcode When ASCII/shift JIS is set
display entry is ON and Notify 0 +1
changes to settings is ON When UNICODE is set
When Enable changes to settings is ON +1 +1
When Notify changes to settings is ON 0 +1
When Specify text color by device is ON +1 +1
Basic 0 1
Message When Specify block No. is External +1 0
display When Notify cursor position is ON +1 +1
When Specify text color by device is ON +1 +1
Alarm When Notify cursor position is OFF 0 0
display When Notify cursor position is ON 1 1
Video Internally 0
Channel 1
display Externally 1
Specify No. 1 1
Updating cycle is
designated internally 0 1
Frame updating Cycle Updating cycle is
Specify designated externally 1 1
Frame exit notification 0 +1
Specify No. +1 +1
Animation Point Internally 0 +1
display specification Cycle
Externally +1 +1
Specify
Position
control Move exit notification 0 +1
X-axis direction +1 +1
Position Y-axis +1 +1
XY-direction +2 +2
Display Display control is effective +1 +1
control Allowable operation is effective +1 +1
When Data length is 1 word 1
Basic 3
When Data length is 2 words *2 2
When Input range is setting other than a When Data length is 1 word +2
numerical value 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
Meters When Data length is 1 word +2
(bar graph/ When Display range is ON +2
pie chart/ When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
fan) When Data length is 1 word +2
When Alarm range is ON +2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Data length is 1 word +1
When Ideal line is ON +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2
When Scale is ON 0 +2

2-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Objects Number of Devices *1 Reference data


Basic Number of devisions 1
Statistical graphs
When Scale is ON 0 +2
(bar graph/pie chart)
When Scale makings is ON 0 +2
Basic
When Input range is
setting other than a
When Data length is 1 word
0
+2
2+Number of graphs

0
2
numerical value When Data length is 2 words *2 +4

SCREENS & WINDOWS


When Display range is When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
ON When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Data length is 1 word +2
When Alarm range is ON +2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Data length is 1 word +1
When Ideal line is ON +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2
When Display control is ON +Number of graphs +Number of graphs
When Store old data date/time is ON +12 +1
Real time When Store new data date/time is ON +12 +1
settings
Cursor position ON +1
When Store cursor data is Date/time information ON +11
ON +1
When Data length is 1 word Number of graphs
When Data length is 2 words *2 Number of graphs x 2
When Scale of item axis is ON 0 +1
When Scale of numerical axis is ON 0 +1
When Data length is 1 word +2
Scale Input range +4
(outer) When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
effective When alarm When Data length is 1 word +2
range is ON +2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When input range is set When Data length is 1 word +1
at non-numerical. +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2
Trend
Graph When Data length is 1 word Number of graphs x
number of display data
Basic 2+Number of graphs
When Data length is 2 words *2 Number of graphs x number of
display data x 2
When input range is set When Data length is 1 word +2
at non-numerical 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Display range is When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
ON When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
Data length +2
When Alarm range is ON +2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Data length is 1 word +1
When Ideal line is ON +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2
When Display control is ON +Number of graphs +Number of graphs
Batch
sampling Cursor position ON +1
When Store cursor data is
When Data length is 1 word Number of graphs +1
ON
When Data length is 2 words *2 Number of graphs x 2
When Sampling trigger is Bit device +1 +1
When Trigger reset is ON +1 +1
When Scale of item axis is ON 0 +1
When Scale of numerical axis is ON 0 +1
Scale When Data length is 1 word +2
(outer) Input range +4
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
effecti
ve When alarm When Data length is 1 word +2
range is ON +2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When input range is set When Data length is 1 word +1
at non-numerical. +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-19


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Objects Number of Devices *1 Reference data


When Data length is 2 word Number of graphs x number
Basic 2+Number of graphs
(Fixed) of display data
When input range is set at
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4 0
non-numerical

2 When Display range is ON


When Alarm range is ON
When Data length is 2 words *2
When Data length is 2 words *2
+4
+4
+2
+2
When Ideal line is ON When Data length is 2 words *2 +2 +1
SCREENS & WINDOWS

When Display control is ON +Number of graphs +Number of graphs


Trend Worksheet Cursor position ON +1 +1
When Store cursor data is
Graph Related When Data length is 2 word
ON Number of graphs x 2
(Fixed)
When Scale of item axis is ON 0 +1
When Scale of numerical axis is ON 0 +1
Scale Input range When Data length is 2 words *2 +4 +4
(outer)
effective When alarm range
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4 +2
is ON
When input range is set at
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2 +1
non-numerical
Basic 0 4+Number of graphs x 2
When Input range X- When Data length is 1 word +2
is setting other axis 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
than a numerical
value Y- When Data length is 1 word +2
axis 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
X- When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
When Display axis When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
range is ON Y- When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
axis When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
X- When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
When Alarm range axis When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
is ON Y- When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
XY Real time axis When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
Graphs settings X- When Data length is 1 word +1
axis +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2
With initial point
Y- When Data length is 1 word +1
axis +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2
When Display control is ON +Number of graphs +Number of graphs
When Store old data date/time is ON +12 +1
When Store new data date/time is ON +12 +1
X-axis 0 +1
With inner scale
Y-axis 0 +1
X-axis 0 +2
With outer scale
Y-axis 0 +2
When Data length is 1 word Number of data x 2+2 +2
With ideal curve
When Data length is 2 words *2 Number of data x 4+2 +3

2-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Objects Number of Devices *1 Reference data

When Data length is 1 word Number of graphs x


X- number of display data x 2
axis Number of graphs x
When Data length is 2 words *2
number of display data x 4
Basic

Y-
When Data length is 1 word Number of graphs x
number of display data x 2
4+Number of graphs x 2
2
axis Number of graphs x
When Data length is 2 words *2

SCREENS & WINDOWS


number of display data x 4
X- When Data length is 1 word +2
When Input range is axis 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
setting other than a
numerical value Y- When Data length is 1 word +2
axis 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
X- When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
When Display range is axis When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
ON Y- When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
axis When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
X- When Data length is 1 word +2
axis +2
When Alarm range is When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
Batch
sampling ON Y- When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
axis When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
X- When Data length is 1 word +1
axis +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2
With initial point
Y- When Data length is 1 word +1
axis +1
+2

When Display control is ON +Number of


+Number of graphs
graphs
When Sampling trigger is Bit device +2 +1
When Store old data date/time is ON +12 +1
XY
Graphs When Store new data date/time is ON +12 +1
X-axis 0 +1
With inner scale
Y-axis 0 +1
X-axis 0 +2
With outer scale
Y-axis 0 +2

When Data length is 1 word Number of


+3
With ideal curve dataÅ~2+2
When Data length is 2 words *2
Number of data4+2 +3
X- When Data length is 2 word Number of graphs x number
axis (fixed) of display data x 2
Basic 4+Number of graphs x 2
Y- When Data length is 2 word Number of graphs x number
axis (fixed) of display data x 2
When input range is X-axis +4 0
set at non-numerical Y-axis +4 0
When Display range is X-axis +4 +2
ON Y-axis +4 +2
When Alarm range is X-axis +4 +2
ON Y-axis +4 +2
Worksheet
Related X-axis +2 +1
With initial point
Y-axis +2 +1
When Display control is ON +Number of graphs +Number of graphs
When Store old data date/time is ON +12 +1
When Store new data date/time is ON +12 +1
X-axis 0 +1
With inner scale
Y-axis 0 +1
X-axis 0 +2
With outer scale
Y-axis 0 +2
With ideal curve When Data length is 2 words *2 Number of data x 4+2 +3

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-21


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Number of Devices Reference


Objects
*1 data
Basic 2 3
When Specify file No. is External +1 0

2 Execute PLC
When Record specify method is Specify No.
(internal) 0 +1
When Record specify method is Specify No.
data folder +1 +1
(external)
SCREENS & WINDOWS

When Specify comment is ON +16*6 +1


When Notify end is ON 0 +1
When Notify error is ON 0 +1
PLC Data Basic 17 3
Folder
Comment When Specify file No. is External +1 0
transfer
Video Basic 1 2
capture, When Trigger reset is ON +1 +1
Save data to
memory When Specify file No. is External +1 0
Function control by devices

card, Save When Notify end is ON 0 +1


worksheet to
memory
card,Save
operating When Notify error is ON 0 +1
log to
memory card
Transfer 1 Basic 3 3
word When Trigger reset is ON +1 +1
Local Basic 1 1
Window When Specify coordinates is ON +2 +2
display When Trigger reset is ON +1 +1
Basic 1 2
Global When Specify window No. is External +1 0
window
display When Specify coordinates is ON +2 +2
When Trigger reset is ON +1 +1
Basic 1 1
Extended When Trigger reset is ON +1 +1
command
When Notify end is ON 0 +1
communicati
on When Notify error is ON 0 +1
When setting up command *11 *12

When Trigger reset is OFF 1 1


Other than
When Trigger reset is ON 2 2
the above
When Notify end is ON *7 0 +1
Internally 0
File No. specify mode 1
Externally 1
BMP file switching
Internally 0 +1
Method of specifying channel*10
Externally +1 +1
VNC display 0 0
Trend graph When Data
+1 x number of
Arithmetic operations Function

(real-time, length is 1
batch word graphs
sampling), +1 x number of
Per single variable (A to E)
XY- When Data graphs
diagram(real- length is 2 +2 x number of
time, batch words *2 graphs
sampling)
When Data
length is 1 +1
Other than word
Per single variable (A to E) +1
the above When Data
length is 2 +2
words *2

2-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

*1 The relationship between device settings (numerical values, PLC devices, indirect references, cells) and the
values for the number of devices in this table is as follows:
(1) When value is set : 0(not number of device for that worksheet, but calculated by 0).)
(2) When a PLC device is set : Number of devices value in this table
(3) When an indirect reference is set: Number of devices value in this table + 1
(4) When a calculation is set : Calculation depends on the number of variables (A to E) used in the
calculation formula. Calculation is performed by the number of devices
2

SCREENS & WINDOWS


in "Calculation" in this table.
Note, however, that when a numerical value (constant) is set to a
variable (A to E), calculation is performed not by the number of devices
in "Calculation" in this table but by 0.
(5) When a cell is set : Number of devices value in this table (Pay attention to notes *2, *5 and
*6 below.)
*2 The number of devices is (value of number of device in that worksheet)/2, if the device of Target is a 32-byte device
or cell.
*3 The end NUL code is not included in the number of text string bytes and number of characters.
*4 Perform calculation and add individually for multiple parts that are swapped by N state parts.
*5 The number of devices to which a cell is set is calculated as follows:
Number of characters+1 => Number of characters/2+1
+ (Number of characters+1)=> +(Number of characters/2+1)
*6 When a cell is selected for a comment-specify device, 17 is added to the number of devices.
*7 Exit notification occurs only when alarm history, trend graph control data, printing and operatinglog are
cleared.
*8 Total number of devices used in the switch function setup
*9 Total reference data used in the switch function setup
*10 When file folder is specified as VTCPT only under VT3 mode.
*11 Depending on the settings of send data/receive data devices of each command.
Each value +0
Each PLC device +0
Each indirect reference +1
Hower, 1 is added incrementally when successive numbers are assigned to PLC devices or indirect reference.
*12 The sum of send data volume and receive data volume of each command.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-23


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Indirect reference devices


The table below lists the number of indirect reference devices that are consumed when "Indirect reference" is
selected in the device setting for each part.
In the case of N state parts, the number of indirect reference devices currently set for all of the states of the N state
part is calculated and totaled individually.

2 If switching function “switch”, lamp switch and cross-key are additionally added, the total number of devices for
indirect reference set in various switches is calculated separately.
Number of
SCREENS & WINDOWS

Objects Function Number of Devices Detailed Setting


Devices Used
Switch bit device 0
Lamp switch Lamp bit device 1
Blink bit device 1
Lamp bit device 1
Lamp
Blink bit device 1
Set bit Switch bit device 0
Set data 0
Set word Target word device
Other than set data 1
Switch Set digits Target word device 1
Set text string Target word device 0
Extended command Send data 0
communication Receive data 0
Other than position control Reference bit device 1
Graphic attribute Position control (specify X-axis relative coordinate specified device 1
controls directly) Y-axis relative coordinate specified device 1
Position control (specify point) Reference word device 1
Reference word device 1
Numerical value Input range/upper and lower limit*1 2
display Display range/upper-lower limit *1 2
Alarm range/upper and lower limit*1 2
Reference word device 1
Text display Specify text color by device
Target word device 1
Specify text color by device
Message display 1
Target word device
Frame updating: specify No. Frame No. 1
Position control (specify point)
Point No. 1
Animation display Point updating: specify No.
Position control (specify X-axis relative coordinate specified device 1
directly) Y-axis relative coordinate specified device 1
Function control by Extended command Send data 0
device communication Receive data 0
Reference word device 1
Input range/upper and lower limit*1 2
Bar graph meter, Pie
chart meter, Fan Display range/upper-lower limit *1 2
meter
Alarm range/upper and lower limit*1 2
Ideal line 1
Statistical bar graph/
Reference word device 1
pie chart graph
Scale (outer) OFF 2
Input range/upper-lower limit
Scale (outer) ON 4
Scale (outer) OFF 2
Trend Graph Display range/upper-lower limit
(Real-time/batch Scale (outer) ON 4
sampling/worksheet Scale (outer) OFF 2
sharing) Alarm range/upper-lower limit
Scale (outer) ON 4
Ideal line 1
Hidden value 1

2-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Number of
Objects Function Number of Devices Detailed Setting
Devices Used
Input range(X-axis)/upper and lower limit*1 2
Input range(Y-axis)/upper and lower limit*1 2
Display range(X-axis)/upper and lower limit*1 2
XYgraphs
(Real-time/batch
sampling/worksheet
sharing)
Display range (Y-axis)/upper and lower limit*1
Alarm range(X-axis)/upper and lower limit*1
2
2 2
Alarm range(Y-axis)/ upper and lower limit*1 2

SCREENS & WINDOWS


Initial point (X-axis) 1
Initial point (Y-axis) 1

*1 When only upper or lower limit is set, the consumed number of devices is (value of number of consumed devices
in that worksheet)/2.

Restriction of images number


The maximum number of images that can be handled on VT STUDIO is limited to 10000 or 20000.
It is possible to switch the count limit setting via the menu "Resources(R)" -> "VT system settings(S)" -> "Others(O)".
"Other", page 12-31
The number of images is counted as follows.

Point • The number of images indicates the number of image data items in the VT3 files. Images
having the same image data content are counted as one image as a duplicity check is
performed.
• When text string replacement display function is used, the accumulated number of images
is equal to the number of ID for the profile file and nameplate (switch, lamp,Nstate
lamp,Nstate components).

Parts Number of Images


Decorative frames, images, outline text 1 per part
1 per part + number of plate states
Switches, lamp switches, lamps Example: In case of plate ON=OFF for a lamp,
1+1=2 images
1 per part + number of states + number of plate states
N state lamp
Example: When a plate is set to states 0 and 1
N state components (type of parts: switch Elamp)
for N state lamp 3 states, 3+2=5 images
Available Without alarm +2
image frame With alarm +4
Without alarm +20
With alarm +60
Numerical value Without alarm +1
Image font With prefix
display With alarm +3
Without alarm +1
With postfix
With alarm +3
Without alarm +20
Minimum font
With alarm +60
Text display Available image frame +2
Animation display Number of frames
Available Without alarm +1
image frame With alarm +3
Bar graph meter Available image frame +3
Pie chart meter
Fan meter ON image +1
Image instrument OFF image +1
With alarm +2
Rectangular/circular
Available image frame +1
Statistical graphs
Message Available image frame +1
Alarm Available image frame +1
Trend Graph Available image frame +1
XY graphs Available image frame +1

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-25


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Parts Number of Images


VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) Max. +2*1
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/ Max.+2*1
Gradation Q5M(W)A

2
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) Max.+6*1
VT3-S12/S10 Max.+9*1
VT3-X15 Max.+16*1
SCREENS & WINDOWS

VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) Max.+2*1
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/ Max.+2*1
Wallpaper Amplified Q5M(W)A
display VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) Max.+6*1
VT3-S12/S10 Max.+9*1
VT3-X15 Max.+16*1
Image
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) Max.+2*1
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/ Max.+2*1
Centralized Q5M(W)A
display
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) Max.+6*1
VT3-S12/S10 Max.+9*1
VT3-X15 Max.+16*1
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) Max.+2*1
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/ Max.+2*1
Parallel Q5M(W)A
Wallpaper Image
display
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) Max.+6*1
VT3-S12/S10 Max.+9*1
VT3-X15 Max.+16*1
Other parts 0 images

The number of images can be confirmed by "Resources(R)" -> "Data check(D)" -> "All data(A)".
"12-9 Data Check"
*1 The number of available images may vary depending upon the contents and size of images.

2-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3
3

FILES & PRINTING


FILES & PRINTING
This chapter describes how to make new data files, and read, save and print
files.

3-1 File Manager •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-2


3-2 Print••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-23

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-1


3-1 File Manager

New(N)
File(F) -> New(N) Ctrl + N

Important VT STUDIO you cannot be make screens for the VT1 series. To make screens for the VT1
series, use VT BUILDER.

3 Makes new files and edit new screens.


VT STUDIO is started up, a window titled "VT STUDIO" is displayed.
FILES & PRINTING

Follow the procedure below to display a new screen.

1 Either select "File" -> "New" from Menu in that order, or click the button .
Before you create a new file, the "VT model settings" window for setting the hardware is displayed.

Point New files must be saved after they are edited.

VT/PLC model settings

Setup the hardware in which the data that is created is to be applied. The "VT model settings" window is always
displayed when VT STUDIO is started up, and "New" is selected to create a new file.
VT model of screen to be created is set in that window.

The startup screen of VT BUILDER is displayed when selecting VT1 series.

For the details of setting, see "12-2 VT Model Setting".


After completion of settings, click “PLC model settings” button to set PLC.

3-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

FILES & PRINTING


For the details of setting, see see "12-3 PLC Model Settings".

VT/PLC model settings can also be changed while files are being edited.
Select according to the sequence of "Resource(R)"-> "VT model settings(V)", "Resource(R)"->"PLC model settings(P)".

Reference Number of dots in the display panel for each VT3 model

Number of Dots of Compatibility of Screen Data


VT3 Model
Displayed Panel among VT3 Models *1
VT3-X15 1024(W) x 768(H) -
VT3-S12/S10 800(W) x 600(H) VT3-S12/S10 compatible
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) 640(W) x 480(H) VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) compatible*2
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/ VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5T(W)A
Q5T(W)A 320(W) x 240(H) compatible*3
VT3-Q5M -
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) 320(W) x 128(H) VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A) compatible
*1 For example, screen data you have made with the "Target VT" set to VT3-S12 can be used on
the VT3-S10 by changing the "Target VT" setting to VT3-S10.
Note, however, that when the "Target PLC" has been changed, devices and other information
must be set again.
*2 VT3-V7R/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) doesn't support MultiTalk function.
Nor support network connection.
Nor support barcode and KL link, etc.
*3 Function switches and operation switches that can only be used in VT3 handy Series cannot
be used in non VT3 handy Series.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-3


3-1 File Manager

Open
File(F) Open(O) Ctrl + O

Reads the file to be edited when editing an already created file.

1
3 Either select "File" -> "Open" from Menu in that order, or click the button
The "Open Files" window is displayed.
.
FILES & PRINTING

2 Select the folder (directory) containing the file to be read and the file name.

Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to be opened.
File name(N) Select the name of the file to be opened.
Files of type(T)*1 Select the type of file. Please select "VTS file(*.vs*.*.vu*)".
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
*1 VTS file names are as follows:
VT STUDIO Version File Name
Ver.1 *.vs1/*.vu1
Ver.2 *.vs2/*.vu2
Ver.3 *.vs3/*.vu3
Ver. 4 or later *.vs4/*.vu4

All VTS files (for VT2/VT3 Series) can be read in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions. However, files may only
be saved as VTS files in Ver. 4/Ver. 3/Ver. 2 formats.

3 Click "Open(O)" button.


The selected file opens.

Point • To open VT files (*.vtd, *.vt2, *.vt3, *.vt4, *.vz4, *.vt5, *.vz5) created in VT1 (VT BUILDER),
open by "Load VT1 files".
• When opening VT2 files (*.vd1, 2, 2u, 3, 3u, *.vx1, 2, 2u, 3, 3u) created by VT2(VT2BUILDER),
click "read VT2 files".

Reference Click "move" button to move the folder in the pull-down menu.
Previous folderPrevious used folder
Current folder or fileFile in current open folder
Screen sample folderFolder for storing screen sample
Default FolderDefault Folder
Last used folderLast used folder

 Auto-backup files
The file name is "! auto-backup file 0.vs4" for individual startup; the backup file name created previously is "! auto-
backup file 0.vs4", and those created subsequently are "! auto-backup file 1.vs4" for multiple startup.

3-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

If VT STUDIO ends in error, the message "VT STUDIO did not end successfully at last file edit. Load backup file?" will
be displayed the next time that VT2 BUILDER is started up. Click the "Yes" button to read auto-backup files.
When the updating time of auto-backup file is set, select sequentially the menu "Edit(E)" -> "Item Setting(I)",
and then set in "file" tab of "item setting" window.
"Option Settings", page 4-22

Loading VT2 Files


File -> Load VT2 files
3

FILES & PRINTING


When VT2 files(*.vd1,2,2u,3,3u,*.vx1,2,2u,3,3u) already created in VT2(VT2 BUILDER) are edited by VT STUDIO,
the files to be edited are read.

1 Select "File" -> "Load VT2 files" from Menu in that order.
Confirmation message is displayed.

“Read VT2 file” window is displayed after clicking "OK" button.

2 Select the folder (directory) containing the file to be read and the file name.

Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to be opened.
File name(N) Select the name of the file to be opened.
File of type(T) Select the type of file. Please select "VT2 file (*.vd*.*.vd*u.*.vx*.*.vx*u)".
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.

3 Click the "Open" button.


The selected file opens.

 Restrictions when reading VT2 files


VT2 files are converted to VTS files when they are read on VT STUDIO. VT model is not changed.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-5


3-1 File Manager

Loading VT1 Files


File -> Load VT1 files

Loads the file to be edited when editing VT1 files (*.vtd, *.vt2, *.vt3, *.vt4, *.vz4, *.vt5, *.vz5) created in VT BUILDER
on VT STUDIO.

3 1 Select "File" -> "Load VT1 files" from Menu in that order.
Confirmation message is displayed.
FILES & PRINTING

2 Click the "OK" button.


"Read VT1file" window appears.

3 Select the folder (directory) containing the file to be read and the file name.

Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to open.
File Name(N) Select the name of the file to open.
File of type(T) Select the type of file. Please select "VT1 file(*.vu*.*.vz*)"
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.

4 Click the "Open" button.


The selected file opens.

 Restrictions when reading VT1 files


VT1 files read by VTSTUDIO are converted into VTS files.

 Conversion of model No.


Model before Conversion (VT1 file) Model after Conversion (VTS file)
VT-10T VT3-V10
VT-10S VT3-V10
VT-7S VT3-V7
VT-5S VT3-Q5S
VT-5M VT3-Q5M
VT-10T+16M VT3-V10+16M
VT-10S+16M/VT-7S+16M VT3-V10+16M
VT-7SR VT3-V7R

3-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

 About compatibility
Item Description
Multiple switches
Multiple lamp
These are divided into individual parts at conversion.
switches
Multiple lamps
Numerical value
These are divided into individual parts at conversion.
tables

Parts
Alarm display
When "Line mode" is set to 2-lines display and "Number of display lines" is set to odd-
number in the alarm display in the VT1 file, the "Number of display lines" in the VTS file
becomes even-number and is reduced by one line. For example, if the number of
3
display lines is set to five lines in the VT1 file, the number of display lines becomes four

FILES & PRINTING


lines when the VT1 file is read and converted to a VTS file.
Ellipses/arcs/fans Ellipses, arcs and fans larger than 1023 dots are converted to 1023 dots.
Numbers having three lower digits are expanded to four digits before they are
Label converted. Note, however, that when the label is "xxx_***", numbers are not converted
to four digits. (xxx: alphabet character for each part)
Messages are copied to the block No.0 and 1 of the message display. Messages are
Block No.0/1 messages
also copied to alarm ID0 and ID1 messages.

Point Parts placed outside of the display frame (green area) are sometimes moved, when imported
to VT2 BUILDER.

Close
File -> Close

Quits editing of screens, and closes the file.


If the file has not been saved since the last change, a confirmation window for checking whether or not to save the file
currently being created is displayed.
• To save the file, click the "Yes" button.
• To not save the file, click the "No" button.
• To cancel the close operation, click the "Cancel" button.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-7


3-1 File Manager

Save
File(F) -> Save(S) Ctrl + S

Saves the screen that has been edited under the same file name as the current file name.
To leave the data before the changes were made, select "Save as" or "Compress and save" described below.

3 Point • When "Save" is selected, data before changes are reflected will be lost.
• The name of newly created file is "Unititled.vs4" by default.
• "Save as" is automatically selected as the save option for newly made files even if "Save"
FILES & PRINTING

is executed.
• "Save as" will be displayed when saving files in VT STUDIO Ver.3 or lower format. Execute
"Save as" and "Compress and save" when saving in "**.vs3/*.vu3/.vs2/*.vu2" format.

Save as/Compress and Save


File -> Save as
-> Compress and save

Saves files under a name different from the current file name. To do this, select "File" -> "Save as" or "Compress and
save" from Menu in that order.
Newly created screens are always saved by "Save as". Enter the file name at "File name" in the "Save as" window.

Item Description
Save in(I)*1 Select the drive and folder to save the file.
File name(N) Enter the file name. The extension name becomes vs4 or vu4.
Select VTS (*.vu4/*.vs3/*.vs2) / VTS compressed files (*.vu4/*.vu3/*.vu2).
Files of type(T) Files saved in "*.vs3/*.vu3, *.vs2/*.vu2" format can be opened by VT STUDIO Ver.3, Ver.2. VTS
file will be saved after compression when VTS compressed file (*.vu4/*.vu3/*.vu2) is selected.
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
*1 The directory to save the file can be set at "VTS file save folder" on the "File" tab in the "Option settings"
window that is displayed by "Edit" -> "Option settings".

Reference • Clicking the button and "Save".


• For details on option settings, see
"Option Settings", page 4-22

Point • If added functions are in use in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions, files cannot be saved in
*.vs3/*.vu3/*.vs2/*.vu2 formats.
"12-9 Data Check", Page 12-46
"A-4 Adding and Modifying Options", Page A-23
• The file in "*.vs3/*.vu3/*.vs2/*.vu2" format will be exported when saved in "*.vs3/*.vu3/*.vs2/
*.vu2" format.

3-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

Import
File -> Import(I)

Import screens and system settings from other VT3/VT2 file.


If only screens are imported, the "Page configuration management" window can also be used. For details, see
"Screen Import" in page 12-52.

Reference For the VT2 model, only screen import is possible.


3
(The menu is changed to "Import screen(I)" and the "Page configuration management" screen

FILES & PRINTING


displayed).

1 Select File(F) -> Import(I) from the menu, or click the button.
The "Open import file" window is displayed.

2 Select the folder containing the VT file and file name to be imported.

Item Description
File position(I) Select the driver disk and folder where the file to be opened is located.
File name(N) Select the file name to be opened.
File type(T)*1 Select the file category. Please select "VTS file(*.vs*,*.vu*)".
Move(M) Click [Move] button, move to existing folders, and recent folders.
*1 VTS file name is shown below.
VT STUDIO Version File name
Ver.1 *.vs1/*.vu1
Ver.2 *.vs2/*.vu2
Ver.3 *.vs3/*.vu3
Ver.4 or later *.vs4/*.vu4

All VTS files can be read in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions. However, files may only be saved as VTS files
in Ver. 4/Ver. 3/Ver. 2 formats.

3 Click the "Open(O)" button.


The "Import" window is displayed.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-9


3-1 File Manager

4 Set up PLC model (Step1).

3
FILES & PRINTING

Item Description
Import result To display PLC model information of import source file.
Select the PLC model for the edited file. Execute "PLC_A" -> "PLC_B" or "PLC_B" -> "PLC_A".
Import source
If MultiTalk is selected, only importing "PLC_A" or "PLC_B" is OK.
This is displayed when station No. is set up in PLC model settings and a station No. can be
selected.

Details settings

Check this option to save VT file being edited before it is imported. Click the "..." button to
Create backup file
change the folder in which files are saved.

5 Click the "Next(N)" button.


The "Step2: Import source settings" window is displayed.

3-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

6 Make necessary settings in the "Step2: Import source settings" screen.

3
(1) (2)

FILES & PRINTING


Item Description
To check the item to be imported.
"Screen" "VT system settings" "Global function switch" "Device comments", "Trend graph",
"Alarm", "Message", "Windows fonts", "Device transfer", "Global function control" "PLC data
(1) Import item
folder", "Worksheet".
Only items contained in the import source file can be displayed. Select an item to display its
advanced settings.
(2) Details settings Set up the import source for each item.
Check this option to save VT file being edited before it is imported. Click the "..." button to
Create backup file
change the folder in which files are saved.

Screen

(1) (2)

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-11


3-1 File Manager

Item Description
To display screens list of import source. Select a page. To select multiple screens, press Shift
and hold the "Shift" key and click the mouse.
(1) Import result Click the button or double click to open the Preview screen.
Click the button to switch between listing display and thumbnail display.
To display screens list of import destination. Select a screen.
To select multiple screens, press Shift and hold the "Shift" key and click the mouse.
Use the "All(L)" option in the right-click menu to select all pages.
3 (2) Import source Click the button to switch between listing display and thumbnail display. Select "All
screens" to display all the pages (Page 0 to 8999).
To change import location, use the "Move(M)" option in the right-click menu or drag and drop to
FILES & PRINTING

other page.
Add selected page to the import destination. Import location is set up in "Import destination
setting" window.

Unused pages in import destination can be searched.


Alternatively, you can select the import source, and right-click the mouse and select "Add to
import source(A)".
Recover the selected page from import destination to import source.
Alternatively, you can select the import source, right-click and select "Delete from import
source(D)".

 VT system settings

To be used for import source screen, and only importable items can be checked.

 Other settings
Check import sources and specify the import destination.
When importing, any used ID or setting No. in the current screen data will be skipped automatically. Import
destination can be manually changed.

3-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

5 Click the "Next(N)" button.


The "Step3: Device settings" window is displayed.

Point In case existing VT system settings or other are imported in the edited screen data, the
overwrite confirmation window will be displayed.

6 Make settings in the "Step3: Device settings" window.


Import destination devices in red color indicate they are already used by the screen data being edited.
The device settings automatically transformed due to KV STUDIO integration will be displayed in bold.
3

FILES & PRINTING


Item Description
Click [Separate Display] button to display the setup of input device separately. Switch separate
Back display
display/batch display, the manually set import device setup will be restored to initial value.
Insert target device Set import target device.
Display device cross reference in the import target. The usage of device in current edit menu
Cross reference
may be confirmed.
Check this option to save VT file being edited before it is imported. Click the "..." button to
Create backup file
change the folder in which files are saved.

7 Click the "Import execution" button.


Once import is completed, the import result is displayed in the "Search result list" window.

 Restrictions on import function


• 1. The number of characters to be imported should not be higher than the max number of characters allowed for
screen files.
However, in case the number of Window fonts is over 64, the excess part can be converted into bitmap fonts
before they are imported.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens", Page 2-14
• The settings of memory capacity will be changed automatically when importing alarm or trend graph.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-13


3-1 File Manager

Read from Memory Card


File -> Memory Card -> Read from Memory Card

Reads VT files for the Memory Card currently saved to Memory Card.

1
3 Select "File" -> "Memory Card" -> "Read from Memory Card" from Menu in that order.
The "Read from Memory Card" window is displayed.
FILES & PRINTING

2 Select the drive containing the VT file for the Memory Card to be read and the file name.

Item Description
Look in(I) Select the Memory Card drive containing the VT file used for the Memory Card.
File name(N) Select the name of the file to be opened.
Files of type(T) *1 Select "VT file (*.ms*.*.md*) for memory card" from files of type.
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.

*1 The file names of VT files for memory card are shown below.
Software Version VT Model File Name
Ver.1 VT2 VTEDT*.md1 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 BUILDER Ver.2 VT2 VTEDT*.md2 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Ver.3 VT2 VTEDT*.md3 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT STUDIO Ver.1
VT3 VTEDT*.ms1 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Ver.2
VT3 VTEDT*.ms2 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT STUDIO Ver.3
VT3 VTEDT*.ms3 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Ver.4 or later
VT3 VTEDT*.ms4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)

3 Click the "Open" button.


The selected VT file for the Memory Card is read.

Point • VT2 files (VTEDT*.md4) for memory cards written using VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions
cannot be read by VT STUDIO Ver. 3/Ver. 2/Ver.1.
• VT files (*.DAT, *.DT3, *.DT5) for Memory Card created on VT1 cannot be read directly on VT
STUDIO. Open the VT file in VT BUILDER, save it as a VT file (*.vtd, *.vt2, *.vt3, *.vt4, *.vz4,
*.vt5, *.vz5), and then open it in VT STUDIO.

3-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

Write to Memory Card


File -> Memory Card -> Write to Memory Card

Writes VT files for Memory Card to the Memory Card.

1 Select "File" -> "Memory Card" -> "Write to Memory Card" from Menu in that order.
The "Write to Memory Card" window is displayed. 3

FILES & PRINTING


2 Select the drive (folder) containing the Memory Card and the file No.

Item Description
Saved as screen data that can After being selected, they are saved into the memory card as screen data that can be
be loaded*1 automatically loaded.
Select the Memory Card drive at the write destination.
Folder*2 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the folder can be set in the "Select Folder"
window.
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
File No. Set the file No. (0 to 9) of the VT file for the Memory Card.
File name Displays the name of the VT file for the Memory Card to be written.
Copy system program When this checkbox is marked, the system program is also written to Memory Card.
*1 For the details of automatic loading, see "Autoload", page 3-16.
*2 The folder to save the file can be set at "VT file for memory card save folder" on the "File" tab in the "Option
Settings" window that is displayed by "Edit" -> "Option settings".

3 Click the "OK" button.


Writes VT files for Memory Card to the Memory Card.
VT Line type File Name
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for File No.0 to 9)
VT3 VTEDT*.ms4 (* stands for File No.0 to 9)

Point • When writing into the memory card, the path to the driver of memory card must be
designated since VT files for memory card shall be read from the path of memory card.
• VT files (*.DAT, *.DT3, *.DT5) for VT1 Memory Cards cannot be written by VT STUDIO.
• The system program of VT2 cannot use VT2 of Ver.1 to 3 to read VT2 files (VTEDT*.md4) for
memory card that are created by VT STUDIO. Send the system program to rewrite the VT2
system program to Ver.3. Also, VT2 files (VTEDT*.md1, VTEDT*.md2) for VT2 BUILDER
Ver.1 or Ver.2 Memory Cards cannot be written in VT2 BUILDER Ver.4. Meanwhile, VT2 files
(VTEDT* . md1,2,3) for memory card of VT2 BUILDER Ver.1 to 3 cannot be created in VT
STUDIO.
• VT3 files (VTEDT*.ms4) for memory cards written using VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions
cannot be read by a VT3 deploying system program Ver. 3/Ver. 2/Ver.1. Execute system
program transmission and overwrite the VT3 system program with Ver. 4. Also note that
VT3 files (VTEDT*.ms3/ms2/ms1) for VT STUDIO Ver. 3/Ver. 2/Ver. 1 memory cards cannot
be written in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions.
• Up to ten VT files for Memory Cards can be written to the Memory Card. The number of
files that can be written to Memory Card changes according to the size of the screen data.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-15


3-1 File Manager

Reference • "Option Settings", page 4-22


• Sending the system program from the Memory Card
VT3 Series Hardware Manual "5-11 Memory Card"
• Sending system program from VT STUDIO
"13-3 PC->VT Send Data"
• Autoload
VT3 Series Hardware Manual, "5-11Memory Card"

3
 Autoload
FILES & PRINTING

If Autoload is used when VT3 host computer is switched on, it's possible to automatically read the screen data and
system program already saved in Autoload file folders in the memory card.

Point • The files in Autoload file folders will be overlapped whenever the screen data for Autoload
is written into the memory card.
• If the memory card that has saved Autoload files is always inserted onto VT3 host
computer, Autoload will be executed whenever switching-on.
• Autoload isn't executed in the case of conflict between screen data for autoload and the
type of VT3.

• Please don't switch off VT3 during the system program is sent. Otherwise, it will damage
the VT3 system and prevent normal operation of the VT3.
• When screen data is read from Memory Card, the screen data that was saved on VT3 will be
lost. At the same time, the historic alarm data, trend graph data(real-time) , XY-graph
NOTICE data(real-time) and operating log will be lost. Save data on VT STUDIO or Memory Card as
required.
• If the system program is sent, the saved screen data, historic alarm data, trend graph
data(real-time), XY-graph data(real-time), PLC file folder data, operating log and setting
data in system mode will be deleted.

3-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

Verify with Memory Card


File -> Memory Card -> Verify with Memory Card

Verifies the screen data currently being edited with the VT file for the Memory Card saved on Memory Card.

1 Select "File" -> "Memory Card" -> "Verify with Memory Card" from Menu in that order.
"The "Verify with Memory Card" window is displayed. 3
2 Select the drive containing the VT file for the Memory Card to be verified and the file name.

FILES & PRINTING


Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive of the Memory Card containing the VT file for the Memory Card to be verified.
File Name(N) Select the name of the file to verify.
Files of type(T) *1 Select "VT file (*.ms*.*.md*) for memory card" from the type of files.
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
*1 The file names of VT files for memory card are shown below.
Software Version VT models File Name
Ver.1 VT2 VTEDT*.md1 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 BUILDER Ver.2 VT2 VTEDT*.md2 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Ver.3 VT2 VTEDT*.md3 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT STUDIO Ver.1
VT3 VTEDT*.ms1 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Ver.2
VT3 VTEDT*.ms2 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT STUDIO Ver.3
VT3 VTEDT*.ms3 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Ver.4 or later
VT3 VTEDT*.ms4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)

3 Click the "Open" button.


The screen data is verified with the selected VT file for the Memory Card.

4 Display the compared results.


The verified results for each data item are displayed.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-17


3-1 File Manager

Point • In the case of conflict of printing trigger bit device of form screen, VT system settings may
differ from each other, so does the screen data.
• In the case of conflict of worksheet, the worksheet may differ from screen data.

Comparing VTS Files

3 File -> Compare with VTS file

Compares the screen data currently being edited with the currently saved VTS file.
FILES & PRINTING

1 Select "File" -> "Compare with VTS file" from Menu in that order.
The "Compare with VTS file" window is displayed.

2 Select the files (file folder) and file names of VTS files to be compared.

Item Description
Look in(I) Selects the drive and folder to which the VTS file to be compared is saved.
File Name(N) Selects the name of the VTS file to be compared.
File of type(T) Select the type of file. Please select "VTS file(*.vs*,*.vu*)"
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.

3 Click the "Open" button.


The screen data is verified with the selected VTS file.

4 Display the compared results.


The verified results for each data item are displayed.

Point • In the case of conflict of printing trigger bit device of form screen, VT system settings may
differ from each other, so does the screen data.
• In the case of conflict of worksheet, the worksheet may differ from screen data.

3-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

Operating Log File Loading


File(F) -> Read operating log(L)

Read operating logs and VT3 files for memory card saved with VT3 series.
The operating logs can be checked by VT STUDIO.

Reference • Save operating log into memory card in VT3 system mode
VT3 Series Hardware Manual, "5-11 Memory Card"
3
• Save operating log into memory card

FILES & PRINTING


"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"

1 Select menu "File(F)" -> "Read operating log(L)" in that order.

2 Select the files to be read.

Item Description
*2 "Open file" window is displayed after clicking this button. Select the operating
Operating log File selection
logs to be read.
VT3 files for
After selection, read VT3 files for memory card together with the operating logs.
VT3 files for memory card
memory card*1 "Read from memory card" window is displayed after clicking this button.
Select
The selected VT3 file for the Memory Card is read.

*1 Under VT3 system mode (memory card - log data), the screen data and operating log are saved into
memory card at the same time. When selecting the operating log in the memory card, VT3 files for
memory card (VTOPL0.ms4) will be automatically selected.
*2 Up to 10 files can be read simultaneously. If several files have been read, the operating logs will be
properly incorporated and displayed. If new operating log is to be read, the operating log already read will
be cleared.

3 Click the "OK" button.


Operating log list appears.

Reference • "11-11 Operation Log"


• "List of the Operation Log", page 11-47

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-19


3-1 File Manager

Ladder Monitor Data Verification

■ Internal ROM and ladder project

1 Select [File(F)]→[Ladder monitor data verification(J)]→[Internal ROM and ladder project(L)] from the menu in
order.

3 2 Select the ladder project verifying with internal memory (ROM) and click "OK" button.
<When object PLC is KV-5500/5000/3000 series and KV Nano Series>
FILES & PRINTING

Item Description
KV STUDIO currently being started To verify with the project of currently started KV STUDIO.
KV STUDIO Project To specify and verify the project of KV STUDIO.

<When object PLC is Q series (Q mode)/QnU series CPU direct link>

"Select ladder project" window appears.

3 "Verification result" window appears.

3-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

■ Memory card and ladder project/memory card

1 Select [File(F)]→[Ladder monitor data verification(J)]→[Memory card and ladder project/memory card(M)] from
the menu in order.

2 Select the ladder monitor data in verification source and the data in verification destination, and click "OK"
button
<When object PLC is KV-5500/5000/3000 and KV Nano Series>
3

FILES & PRINTING


<When object PLC is Q series (Q mode)/QnU series CPU direct link>

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-21


3-1 File Manager

Item Description
Select a drive To specify drive and select ladder monitor data when checked.
Verification Drive To select the memory card drive.
source (Ladder To display the drive and folder of memory card. The folder is "drive
monitor data) Folder name":\VTLDR.(e.g. the folder is D:\VTLDR when drive of memory
card is D.)
KV STUDIO currently being started To select the project of currently started KV STUDIO.
Verification
3 target (Ladder
project/Ladder
KV STUDIO Project
Ladder project
To select the project of KV STUDIO.
To select ladder project.
monitor data)
Ladder monitor data To select ladder monitor data.
FILES & PRINTING

3 "Verification result" window appears.

File Log
File -> File log

The last four edited files are memorized and displayed as a file log. When the log of the file to be edited is selected
from the "File" menu, the file is opened and can be edited,

Exit
File -> Exit

Saves the screen currently being edited and exits VT STUDIO.


The confirmation window for checking whether or not to save the screen currently made screen is displayed.

• To save the file, click the "Yes" button.


• To not save the file, click the "No" button.
• To cancel the close operation, click the "Cancel" button.

The file that you made is saved, and VT STUDIO is exited.

3-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-2 Print

Print Settings
File -> Print settings

Set the print items in advance to print screens after they have been made.

1
3
Select "File" -> "Print settings" from Menu in that order.
The "Print settings" window is displayed.

FILES & PRINTING


2 Set the print items in the "Print settings" window, and click the "OK" button.
This enables the print settings.

Common

Item Description
Select and check the item to be printed from "Cover", "VT system settings", "Global function
Print items switch", "Trend graph", "Alarm", "Message", "Windows fonts", "Device transfer", "Global function
control", "Worksheet (settings)", "Page configuration" and "Screen".
Print start page No. Set the starting page number to be printed at the lower part of paper.
Select either to directly output to the printer and print, or save the print image as a rich text
Output to
format file (RTF file).
Print preview Displays a preview of the selected print target.
Printer settings Sets the printer to be used.
Print Executes printing.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-23


3-2 Print

 When the output destination is set to RTF


If you print with the output destination set to RTF file, the "Select output destination folder" window is displayed.
Set the drive and directory (folder) to save the rich text file (RTF) to.

3
FILES & PRINTING

The name of the file to be saved is as follows:


[path] / [file]_[number].rtf
[path] : Directory name specified by the directory name
[file] : VTS file name with an extension name of vs4/vu4/vs3/vu3/vs2/vu2 is not included.
[number] : Continuous number (1, 2, 3 ...)*
* Rich Text(RTF) files are divided and saved to avoid oversize.

Cover setting

The following describes an instance of when to print a cover.

3-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-2 Print

Item Description
Date When this checkbox is marked, the date is printed on the cover.
Font name Sets the font name for the date.
Date Font size Sets the font size (8 to 36) for the font.
Text string Sets the text string for the date.
Current date Today's date is set to the text string when the "Current date" button is clicked.
Title When this checkbox is marked, the titleis printed on the cover.

Title
Font name
Font size
Sets the font name for the title.
Sets the font size (8 to 72) for the title.
3
Text string Sets the text string for the title.

FILES & PRINTING


Author When this checkbox is marked, the author is printed on the cover.
Font name Sets the font name for the author.
Author
Font size Sets the font size (8 to 72) for the author.
Text string Sets the text string for the author.
Memo When this checkbox is marked, the memo is printed on the cover.
Font name Sets the font name for the memo.
Memo
Font size Sets the font size (8 to 36) for the memo.
Text string Sets the text string for the memo.

VT system settings

No special setting items are provided for printing VT system settings.


The following settings can be printed by VT system settings:
• Target VT • Parts setting • Printer
• Terget PLC • Changing display text strings • Video
• VT system • Operating log setting • VNC Server
• Communication Setup • KL Setup • PLC time synchronization
• System Memory Area • Barcode • VT timer
• Password • Memory Card • Other

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-25


3-2 Print

Global Function Switch

Print is possible only when the VT3 handy Series are used.
No settings are required when global function switch is printed.

Trend Graph

3 The following describes an instance of when to print a trend graph.


FILES & PRINTING

Item Description
Trend graph list Select the ID (0 to 3) of the trend graph to print.
Select all All IDs in the trend graph list are selected when the "Select all" button is clicked.

Alarm

The following describes an instance of when to print alarm settings.

Item Description
Alarm list Select the ID (0 to 3) of the alarm to print.
Select all All IDs in the alarm list are selected when the "Select all" button is clicked.
Print items Select the target item to print.

3-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-2 Print

Message

The following describes an instance of when to print message settings.

FILES & PRINTING


Item Description
Message list Select the block No. to print.
Select all All block Nos. in the message list are selected when the "Select all" button is clicked.

Windows font

No special setting items are required when printing the settings of Windows font.
Print the comment and number of characters of registered words in Windows font.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-27


3-2 Print

Device transfer

The settings for device sending to be printed are described.

3
FILES & PRINTING

Item Description
Device sending list Select device sending No. to be printed.
Select all Click "select all" button, and select all No. in the list.

Global Function Control

No special setting items are required when printing the global function control.
Print the settings of global function control in "Global function control".
"12-7 Global Function Control"

3-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-2 Print

Worksheet (settings)

No special setting items are provided for printing worksheets (settings).


With worksheet (settings), worksheet system settings are printed.
"16-3 Worksheet System Settings"

Reference Worksheet settings can be printed by the worksheet editing tool.

3
"16-2 Setting Worksheets"

FILES & PRINTING


Page Configuration

The following describes an instance of when to print a page configuration.

Item Description
Print items Select the target item to print.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-29


3-2 Print

Screen

The following describes an instance of when to print a screen.

3
FILES & PRINTING

Item Description
Screen list Select the screen to print.
Select all All screens in the screen list are selected when the "Select all" button is clicked.
Print target screen Select the screen to print from base/window/printer form.
Print items Select the target item to print.
Label *1 When this checkbox is marked, labels are printed.
Device No. *1 When this checkbox is marked, device Nos. are printed.
Memo *2 When this checkbox is marked, memos are printed.
Reverse black-and white When this checkbox is marked, black-and-white is reversed and printed when
tones printing "Screen" in black-and-white.
Print window over base When this checkbox is marked, windows 1, 2 and 3 are printed overlapping the
base screen. Global windows are not overlapped.
Print
When this checkbox is marked, the outside of the display frame (green area) is
screen
Print entire edit screen also printed when printing "Screen".
settings Outside of the display frame is printed white.
Reflect screen size When this checkbox is marked, the printed result reflects the screen size.
State No. Switches the display state No.

Switches the display text string ID (0 to 7).


Display text string ID *3
Execute printing in the case of ON/OFF state of lamp switch, lamp bit device of
Preview display
lamp and reference bit device for graphics attribute control.
*1 "Label", page 5-26
"Device No.", page 5-27
• Font size of labels and device Nos.
"Option Settings", page 4-22
*2 "7-6 Setting Memos"
*3 "11-6 Changing Display Text Strings"

3-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-2 Print

Print Preview
File -> Print preview

Displays a preview of the print items set at "Print settings".


Item Description
Print Executes printing.
Page No.
Next page
Specifies the page to display.
Changes the page No. to display to the next page.
3

FILES & PRINTING


Previous page Changes the page No. to display to the previous page.
Enlarge display Enlarges the display.
Reduce display Displays an entire single page on screen.
Exit Exits print preview.

Point The print preview screen is not displayed if no print items are selected at "Print settings".
The print items set at "Print settings" is automatically executed.

Print
File -> Print Ctrl + p

Prints the print items set at "Print settings".

Point • Before you execute printing, check whether or not the printer settings are correct. If these
settings are not correct, click the "Printer settings" in the "Print settings" window and
correct the settings.
• Printing is not executed if a print item is not selected at "Print settings". The print items
set at "Print settings" is automatically executed.

Output Screen Data BMP File


File -> Output screen data to BMP file

Display images of screens are saved as Windows bitmap (BMP) files or JPEG files.
This feature is useful for pasting and editing saved files in Microsoft Word, and making job instruction sheets or User's
Manuals.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-31


3-2 Print

Item Description
Enter the drive and directory (folder) name for saving the display image file of
Output destination folder
the screen.
File format Select the format to save the file in.
Screen list Select the screen for outputting to file.
Select all All screens in the screen list are selected when the "Select all" button is clicked.
Select the screen to be output to file from base, windows 1, 2 and 3, global
Target screen
3 Label *1
window, and printer form.
When this checkbox is marked, the label is displayed on the screen image.
*1 When this checkbox is marked, the device No. is displayed on the screen
Device No.
FILES & PRINTING

image.
Memo *2 When this checkbox is marked, the memo is displayed on the screen image.
When this checkbox is marked, the outside of the display frame (green area) is
Display entire edit
Display also printed when output-ting "Screen" to file. Outside of the display frame is
screen
printed white.
contents of
Reverse black- If file output is selected under black-and-white mode, the files are output after
screen andwhite tones black-and-white is reversed.
images State No. Switches the display state No.

Switches the display text string ID (0 to 7).


Display text string ID *3
Execute file output in the case of ON/OFF state of lamp switch, lamp bit device
Preview display
of lamp and reference bit device for graphics attribute control.
Backlight color *4 Specify backlight color when outputting files.
*1 "Active Edit", page 5-26
"Device No.", page 5-27
• Font size of labels and device Nos.
"Option Settings", page 4-22
*2 "7-6 Setting Memos"
*3 "11-6 Changing Display Text Strings"
*4 Only VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A) /W4G (A) can be set.

The name of the file to be saved is as follows:


[path] / [file]_[page]_[window].bmp(jpg)
[path] : Directory name specified by the file output directory name
[file] : VTS file name with an extension name excluding vs4/vu4/vs3/vu3/vs2/vu2.
[page] : Page No., global window No., printer form page No.
[window] : Currently selected window
Base:B, Window 1:1, Window 2:2, Window 3:3
Full-size window: W, printer form: P
Example) Select base only B
Select windows 12
Select base and all windows 1, 2, 3 B123
Select global window W
Select printer form P

3-32 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4
4
EDIT

EDIT
This chapter describes operations such as moving, scaling, deleting, copying
and rotating drawn graphics, text and parts.

4-1 Editing Graphics....................................................... 4-2


4-2 Edit Functions .......................................................... 4-6

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-1


4-1 Editing Graphics

Operation Basics
Basic operation is as follows:

1 Click the button on the tool bar.

2 Select the object.


The selection frame is displayed around the selected object.
"Object Selection Frame and Selection Handles", page 4-7

3 Align the mouse cursor with the item on the icon menu, and click.

4 To move or scale the graphic, drag instead of clicking.

4 Execute the operation, and cancel the selection.


EDIT

Move
In addition to graphics, switches/lamps and basic parts, meters/graphs, device Nos. displayed for these, and labels
can also be moved. The following describes how each of these objects is moved.

1 Align the mouse cursor with the object.


A cross-hair cursor is displayed under the mouse cursor.

2 Drag the selected object to the move destination. Cross-hair curs

Reference • In the case of text, paint graphics, switches/lamps, basic parts, and meters/ graphs, align the mouse
over the object and drag. In the case of straight lines or line graphics, align the mouse over the line
and drag.
• When objects are selected, the objects are moved in 1 dot increments if click cursor key
.
• When objects are selected, the types, position, size and labels of selected objects will be displayed
in the status bar. Therefore, adjust slightly when aligning and sizing.
• If the setting of “as per grid” is temporarily cancelled when moving parts, the setting of “as per grid”
will be contrary to current setting after pressing key .
That’s to say, if selecting “as per grid”, the settings will be cancelled temporarily after pressing key
; if not selecting “as per grid”, the settings will be effective temporarily after pressing key .

Moving switches
Switch areas move interlocked with objects when an object to which a touch switch such as lamp switch or switch is
moved.
To move only switch areas, select the lamp switch or switch, and select "Edit" -> "Change switch area" from Menu to
change the switch area.
"Changing the Switch Area", page 4-20

When the object has been moved


The switch area moves interlocked with the object.

Switch

Drag

Switch

4-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-1 Editing Graphics

Changing the switch area


Change (move or scale) only the switch area.

Switch Switch

Drag

4
Reference • The grouped objects, selected groups and continuously selected objects can be moved in a single

EDIT
operation.
• The display of device Nos. and labels also move at the same time when moving objects such as
switches, lamps and basic parts.

Scaling Graphics
In addition to graphics, switches/lamps, basic parts, and meters/graphs can also be scaled (enlarged or reduced).
The following describes how each of these objects is scaled.

1 Click the objects to keep them in selected state.


The selection frame is displayed around the object.

2 Align the mouse cursor with the selection handles in the direction to scale the graphic, and drag.

Selection frame Handle

Drag mouse cursor

Mouse cursor

Reference • Numerical value displays, text displays, message displays, alarm displays, and bitmap text can be
scaled up to 8X in both the horizontal and vertical directions in integer multiples.
• Numerical value displays containing 1-byte can be reduced to 1/4X in the vertical direction.
• When stroke fonts are set to numerical value displays, text displays, message displays, and alarm
displays, stroke fonts can be scaled from 2X or higher in 1dot increments.
• When objects are selected while pressing key, if clicking cursor key , the scaling
of objects can be executed based on upper left corner of objects.
• The aspect ratio of objects is held if the object is scaled with the key held down.
• If dynamic edit shall be closed during scaling, select "View(V)" -> "Dynamic edit(Q)" buttons from the
menu, or click button in that order.
•When "Enable smoothing resize function", appearance of the following components will not be
influenced, even if they are zoomed in or out.
· Switch · Indicator switch · Indicator
· Numerical value display component · Text display component · Info display component
· Alarm display component · Bar-shaped image meter · Round image meter
· Fan-shaped image meter

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-3


4-1 Editing Graphics

Scaling switches
Switch areas are scaled interlocked with objects when an object to which a touch switch such as a lamp switch or
switch is scaled.
To scale only switch areas, select the lamp switch or switch, and select "Edit" -> "Change switch area" from Menu to
change the switch area.
"Changing the Switch Area", page 4-20

When the object has been scaled


The switch area is scaled interlocked with the object.

4
Switch
Switch
EDIT

Drag

Changing the switch area


Change (scale or move) only the switch area.

Switch Switch

Drag

Reference • Grouped objects can be scaled in a single operation.


• When grouped objects contain a numerical value display, text display, message display or alarm
display, these can be scaled only in integer multiples. However, if stroke font, image font and
Window font are set, they are automatically adjusted to the size similar to the scaling ratio.

Scaling outline fonts


When a text string has been enlarged in the horizontal direction
The font size is determined according to the size that is dragged in the vertical direction.
Kerning is automatically sized in the horizontal direction so that it matches the dragged size.

Outline
Drag
Outline
When a text string has been enlarged in the vertical direction
The font size is determined according to the size dragged in the horizontal direction.
Outline text is automatically placed at the center of the size dragged in the vertical direction.

Outline

Outline
Drag

Reference • Outline text cannot be scaled when "Auto-size" is not set.


• Outline text can also be scaled when objects are grouped.
• If the upper limit of 512 of font size is exceeded, then it will be enlarged according to font size of 512
(72 in the case of model VT2).
4-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
4-1 Editing Graphics

Scaling when multiple objects are selected

1 Set the required multiple objects by group selection or continuous selection.


The selection frame is displayed around the object.
"Selecting Object Groups", page 4-6
"Continuously Selecting Objects", page 4-7

2 Align the mouse cursor with the selection handles in the direction to scale the graphic, and drag.

Drag mouse cursor


4

EDIT
Reference • When multiple objects are selected, if the selected objects contain a numerical display, text display,
message display, alarm display and bitmap text, they can be scaled only in integral multiples. If
stroke font, image font and Windows font (excluding bitmap font) are set, theyíre automatically
adjusted to the size similar to the scaling ratio.
• When multiple objects are selected, if the selected objects contain parts set with outline font or
Windows font, theyíre enlarged to font size128 (72 for VT2) if the font size exceeds the upper limit128.
• When objects are selected while pressing key, if clicking cursor key , the
scaling of objects can be executed based on upper left corner of objects.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-5


4-2 Edit Functions

Selecting Objects (graphics)


To shift from drawing to editing, click the button on the tool bar. Once clicked, the button is held in the clicked
state. So, this button needs not be clicked again to continue editing.

Draw Click Edit Click

4 Selecting Individual Objects


EDIT

The following describes how to select individual objects.

Text or paint graphics


Click after aligning the mouse cursor with upper part of texts or images.

Straight lines or line graphics


Align the mouse cursor over the line and click.

Selecting Object Groups


The following describes how to select groups of objects.

ABCDEFG ABCDEFG
Drag from start
point to end point.

You can select all objects within a specific area by dragging across the desired objects in such a way that they are all
enclosed. The selection frame is displayed around all objects in the dragged area.

Point Group selection is not possible when the cursor is dragged over a paint graphic (drawn
graphic whose "Plane attribute" checkbox is marked) or an image. In this case, only paint
graphics or images are moved.
If groups are selected when drawing graphics or the objects prior to the pictures, drag by
pressing key .

Drag without pressing key. Drag with key held down.

The group is selected, and the


selection frame is displayed on all
This moves paint graphics
objects within the dragged area.
or images.

4-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Continuously Selecting Objects


Continuously select each object one at a time.

Select the objects in the same way as individual objects.

Click

Align the cursor with the next object to select, and click while holding
down the on the PC's keyboard.
4

EDIT
Click with
held down.

Multiple objects are selected in this way.

Canceling Selection
Cancel selections as follows when multiple objects are selected:

Canceling all selections


• Click the mouse at a location where there are no objects.
• Select another object.
• Draw a new object.

Canceling only some selections


• Align the mouse cursor with the object whose selection is to be canceled, and click while pressing the key .

Object Selection Frame and Selection Handles


A frame indicating the selected state is displayed when an object is selected. This frame is called the "object selection
frame," and the "" marks on the frame line are called "Selection handles."

Object selection frame

Selection handle
a b a

c c Scale in horizontal direction.

a b a
Scale in horizontal and vertical
directions. To scale at the
Scale in vertical direction. same scaling ratio, drag with
the key held down.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-7


4-2 Edit Functions

Select one from many


+ + +

Select one object at a time in order from multiple selected objects. This feature is handy when you want to select one
object from among multiple overlapping objects. You can also select one object at a time from all objects by using
this feature together with "Select all".

Reference When "Select one of multiple parts" is performed, judge which objects are selected from the status bar
display.
4
1 Select the multiple graphics.
EDIT

The selection frame is displayed around each of the selected objects.


All objects can be selected by using "Select all(L)".

2 By clicking the button


Of the selected objects, the type, position, size and label of the object on the background plane is displayed on the
status bar.

3 By clicking the button


• The information of the selected objects is displayed in order on the status bar.
• When the target object you want to select is displayed, the selection frame and handles are displayed around that
graphic to indicate that it is selected.

All Square Circle Triangle


selected selected selected selected

4 Change the attributes and position of the selected object.

5 If there is another selected object, click the button.


To cancel a selection, click the mouse anywhere there is no object.

Select one from the Cascaded Components


Ctrl + Shift + Click
To select sequentially from the front for several cascaded objects. It is convenient for selecting one among several
cascaded objects.

Reference When "Select one from the cascaded components" is executed, the object in selected status can be
determined from display of the status bar.

1 Press " Ctrl + Shift " and click mouse at the same time.
For the cascaded objects that have been selected, the type, position, size and label of the foremost object will be
displayed on the status bar.

2 Press " Ctrl + Shift " and click mouse at the same time.
• The information of the selected objects is displayed on the status bar in turn.

4-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

• When the object you want to select is displayed, the selection frame and selection mark are displayed around that
graphic to indicate that it is selected.

Triangle selected Circle selected Square selected

Ctrl Ctrl
+ +
Shift Shift

+ +

4
Click Click

EDIT
Ctrl + Shift + Click

3 Change the attributes and settings of the selected objects.


To cancel a selection, click the mouse anywhere no object exists.

Undo
Edit(E) -> Undo(U) +

Cancels the previous operation and restores the previous state.

Redo
Edit(E) -> Redo(R) +

Redoes operations that were undone by "Undo(U)".

Cut
Edit(E) -> Cut(T) +

Cuts the object on the screen.

Reference Cut objects can be placed on screen by the "Paste" operation.

Copy
Edit(E) -> Copy(C) +

Copies the selected object. Copied objects can be placed on screen by the "Paste" operation described below.

Reference • When multiple objects are selected by grouping or continuous selection, the selected multiple
objects can be copied in a single operation.
• Copying of only device Nos. and labels is not possible.
• Select position to be pasted through mouse cursor when pasting to the same pages with copy
source.
• The part will be pasted to the same coordinate with that of copy source part when pasted to different
page with that of copy source.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-9


4-2 Edit Functions

Paste
Edit(E) -> Paste(P) +

Pastes copied objects onto the screen.

Reference • Copied multiple objects can be pasted together in a single operation.


• Copying-and-pasting can be performed in a single operation by dragging with the ckey held down.
• Pasting position can be selected with mouse after pasting when pasting to the samepage as the
configured page of components of copy source.

4 • Compoments are pasted to the same coordinates as the configured coordinates of components of
copy source when pasting to the page different from the copy source.
EDIT

Delete
Edit(E) -> Delete(D)

Deletes the selected object.

Reference • When multiple objects are selected by grouping or continuous selection, the selected multiple
objects can be deleted in a single operation.
• If you have deleted an object by mistake, you can restore the deleted object to its original state by
selecting "Edit" -> "Undo" ( + key) immediately after the “Delete” operation.

Select all
Edit(E) -> Select all(L) +

All objects on screen can be selected in a single operation.

4-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Search
Edit(E) -> Search(X) +

Search parts from screen data that match the specified conditions.

1 Select "Edit(E)" -> "Search(X)" from Menu in that order.


The "Find" window is displayed.
Open menu with right mouse button, it’s also display after selecting “Search(H)”.

2 Select the Search key. 4

EDIT
Item Description
Not specify To search from all parts and settings in the search range.
Specify the bit device to be searched. When the number of devices is set to 2 or above, the
specified leading device will be taken as the start of the search range and the specified number
Bit device of devices will be searched.
When this option is checked, only the leading device will be searched for parts and settings
referring multiple devices.
To specify the word device to be searched. When the number of devices is set to 2 or above, the
specified leading device will be taken as the start of the search range and the specified number
Word device of devices will be searched.
When this option is checked, only the leading device will be searched for parts and settings
referring multiple devices.
Unsetting device Only unsetting devices will be searched.
To specify the device comments or character strings contained in the device comments to be
Device comments
searched.
To specify the worksheet cell or ID to be searched. Cells that are referred by parts, settings, and
cell, but are not set up can also be searched.
Worksheet
When this option is checked, only the leading cell will be searched for parts and settings
referring multiple cells.
Character string To specify the character strings contained in the parts and settings to be searched.

Reference In case the part, to which PLC device is set up, is selected, the Search key will be used as the PLC
device of this part in the Search windwo being displayed.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-11


4-2 Edit Functions

3 Select search range.

Item Description
Check this option in case of searching screen and select the pages, windows, or parts (category
Screen
4 System setting
and function) to be searched.
Check this option in case of searching system settings and select the system settings to be
searched.
EDIT

Reference In case the part, to which PLC device is set up, is selected, the Search key will be used as the PLC
device of this part in the Search windwo being displayed.

4 Click “Search” button.


The search results are shown in the search results list.
"System setting", page 5-17

Multiple copy
Edit(E) -> Multiple edit(W) + +

Copies multiple selected objects taking the top left of the copy source objects as the reference point.

1 Make multiple objects copied in selected state.


The selection frames are displayed around the selected objects.

2 Select "Edit(E)" -> "Multiple copy(W)" from Menu in that order.


The "Mulitple copy" window is displayed.
Multiple copy is also possible by opening Menu by clicking the right mouse button and selecting "Multiple copy(W)".

4-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Item Description
Number of X-axis Set the number of copies to be made in the X-axis (horizontal) direction.
copies *1 Y-axis Set the number of copies to be made in the Y-axis (vertical) direction.
Select how multiple copied objects are to be placed.
Clearance/interval Clearance:Specify by the clearance between objects.
Interval: Specify by the interval between objects.
Interval *1 Set the clearance or interval in the X-axis (horizontal) direction as
X-axis
a number of dots.
Set the clearance or interval in the Y-axis (vertical) direction as a
Y-axis
number of dots.
When this checkbox is marked, the target (reference) device set
Increment decrement of device No.
to switches/lamps or basic parts is automatically incremented
during multiple copy.
4
X-axis priority In the case of increment\decrement of device No, X-direction priority.

EDIT
Direction
Increment Y-axis priority In the case of increment\decrement of device No, Y-direction priority.
decrement Auto The device No. is automatically incremented.
of device No. Increment
Specify Increment\decrement of device No. according to specified number.
number/
decrement Number
If “increment number” is “specified”, increment number(1 to
number increments/
65535)\decrement number(-65535 to-1) is set.
decrement

*1 Multiple copy cannot be set in the case of a number of copies or interval that will result in the multiple copied
objects protruding from the edit window. In this case, the following error message will be displayed.

*2 When a cell is set for the target (reference) device, the device will be incremented regardless of the direction
and number of increments settings.

3 Click the "OK" button.


The multiple copied objects appear on the screen.

Point • When multiple objects are selected by grouping or continuous selection, multiple copy of
the selected multiple objects is performed in a single operation.
• Multiple copy is not possible by a number of copies or interval that will result in the
multiple copied objects protruding from the edit window.
• "Number of selected objects x number of copies in X-axis x number of copies in the Y-axis"
can be set as the number of multiple copies as long as it is within 256 copies.
• Multiple copying of only device Nos. and labels is not possible.

Reference Example of PLC device incrementing (N: device No.)


• X direction=5, Y direction=2, X direction priority, automatic
N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4
N+5 N+6 N+7 N+8 N+9

• X direction=5, Y direction=2, X direction priority, specified (number of increments=10)


N N+10 N+20 N+30 N+40
N+50 N+60 N+70 N+80 N+90

Example of cell incrementing


• X direction=4, Y direction=3

C2 D2 E2 F2
C3 D3 E3 F3
C4 D4 E4 F4

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-13


4-2 Edit Functions

Grouping

Group

Edit(E) -> Group(G) ->Group(G) +

Groups all selected multiple objects as a single object.

4 Point • Grouped multiple objects can be moved, deleted, copied, and cut in a single operation as
they are handled as a single object.
EDIT

• Graphic attribute controls cannot be set again after a graphic to which graphic attribute
control has been set is grouped with other graphics.

Ungroup

Edit(E) -> Group(G) -> Ungroup +

Restores a grouped object to multiple objects.

Point Graphics to which graphic attribute control has been set after grouping cannot be ungrouped
unless all graphic attribute controls have been disabled.

Regroup

Edit(E) -> Group(G) -> Regroup(R) + +

Regroups multiple objects ungrouped by "Ungroup(U)".

Point • Grouped multiple objects can be moved, deleted, copied, 1and cut in a single operation as
they are handled as a single object.
• Graphic attribute controls cannot be set again after a graphic to which graphic attribute
control has been set is grouped with other graphics.

4-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Order

Move to front

Edit(E) -> Order(O) -> Move to front(T) + +

Moves the selected object to the front of existing objects.


"Move to front" is an editing operation for moving the object at the back to the front when the object that should be at
the front is hidden behind an object that was drawn later.
4
Move to back

EDIT
Edit(E) -> Order(O) -> Move to the back(K) + +

Moves the selected object to the back of existing objects.


"Move to back" is an editing operation for moving the object at the front to the back of previously drawn objects.

Move forward

Edit(E) -> Order(O) -> Move to front(F) +

Moves selected objects forward.

Move backward

Edit(E) -> Order(O) -> Move to the back(B) +

Moves selected objects backward.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-15


4-2 Edit Functions

Rotate/Flip

Rotate

Edit(E) -> Rotate/Flip(F) -> Rotate(R)

Rotates the selected graphic by 90° in the clockwise direction. Rotate in a clockwise direction.
Lines, continuous lines, rectangles, polygons, circles and ellipses, arcs, fans and bitmap texts can be rotated.

4 Point • Switch/indicator, basic component, meter/graph, memo, image, decoration frame and
screen call etc. can not be rotated.
EDIT

• Selected multiple objects cannot be rotated. Rotate as an object after combination.


• Grouped objects cannot be rotated if the object group contains an object that cannot be
rotated.

Flip horizontal/Flip vertical

Edit(E) -> Rotate/Flip(F) -> Flip horizontal(H)


Edit(E) -> Rotate/Flip(F) -> Flip vertical (V)

Rotates selected graphics horizontally or vertically.


Lines, continuous lines, rectangles, polygons, circles and ellipses, arcs, and fans can be flipped.

Point The following functions cannot be reversed even if they are reversed "right and left" or "up
and down" .
• Angle and direction of nameplate
• Grouped components selected together with other components
• Grouped components (A) further grouped together with other components

Place/Align
Edit(E) -> Place/Align(N) +

Multiple selected objects can be aligned to the left/right/top/bottom or center, or arranged at even intervals.

Reference The icons on “Place/align” window can also be selected from control/edit tool bar.

4-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Item Button Description

Aligns the top edge of all selected objects with the


Align Top top edge of the circumscribing rectangle of the
currently selected objects.

Align upper and lower centerlines of all selected


Align
objects with upper and lower centerlines of
Place/align in vertical direction

Middle
circumscribing rectangle of multiple selected objects.

EDIT
Arranges all selected objects so that the spacing
Align along the center line in the horizontal direction of
Vertically each object is uniform with respect to the currently
selected objects.

Align the lower edge of all selected objects with the


Align
lower edge of circumscribing rectangle of multiple
Bottom
selected objects.

Placing and alignment is not performed in the


None -
vertical direction.

Align the left edge of all selected objects with the left
Align left edge of circumscribing rectangle of multiple selected
objects.

Align the left and right centerlines of all selected with


Align
Place/align in horizontal direction

left and right centerlines of circumscribing rectangle


Center
of multiple selected objects.

Align Place all selected objects such that the left and right
Horizontally centerlines of various objects are equally spaced.

Align the right edge of all selected objects with the


Align right right edge of circumscribing rectangle of multiple
selected objects.

None Placing and alignment is not performed in the horizontal direction. -

Reference Apply guideline to facilitate the operations of placing\alignment.


"Guide line", page 5-23

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-17


4-2 Edit Functions

Screen attribute settings


Edit(E) -> Screen attribute setting(M) +

Sets the attributes of base screens, window screens and form screens.

1 The "Screen attribute settings" window is displayed so that you can set the screen attributes.
Display the "Screen attribute settings" window by one of the following methods:
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Screen attribute settings(M)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button

4 • By selecting the screen to edit on the "Screen" tab in the workspace, opening Menu by clicking the right mouse
button, and selecting "Screen attribute settings(A)"
• By double-clicking the screen to edit at the "Screen" tab in the workspace
EDIT

For details on setting items on each of the setting tabs


"12-1 New Screen"

4-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Parts Attribute Settings


Edit(E) -> Parts attribute settings(S)

Changes the settings of switches/lamps, basic parts and meters/graphs, and drawn graphics to which graphic
attribute controls have been set.

1 Select the switch/lamp, basic part, or meters/graphs whose settings you want to change.

2 Either select "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order, or click the button .
The setting window for the respective object is displayed. The window that is displayed varies according to the object
that is selected. Display the setting window of various objects using either of the following methods. 4
• Double click the objects.

EDIT
• By opening the menu by clicking the right mouse button, and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)"
• Double click the lines of the object parts in the search results list.

For details on setting items


"Chapter 8 SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS"
"Chapter 9 SETTING BASIC PARTS"
"Chapter 10 SETTING METERS & IMAGES"
"7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls"

Reference "11-9 Batch Edition of the Part Attributes"

Register part attribute as default settings


Edit(E) -> Register part attribute as default settings(Q)

Any part in the screen can be easily registered as the default value of part creation.

1 Select the parts to be registered as default value (graph, switch, lamp switch, lamp, outline text, bitmap text,
and numeric value display).

2 Select Edit(E) -> Register part attribute as default settings(Q) from the menu.
Alternatively, you can select "Register part attribute as default settings(Q)" from right-click menu.

Point A part containing the following settings cannot be registered as default settings.
• Graphs for which Graph Attribute Control is set up
• Switches/lamp switches/lamps in free style
• Outline text using a Logo
• Numeric value display using free style in the image

Reference "Parts attribute", page 4-24

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-19


4-2 Edit Functions

Changing the Switch Area


Edit(E) -> Change switch area(A)

Changes the switch area (area that functions as the switch) of lamps switches, switches, key entry parts and other
parts.
Normally, switch areas are automatically set matched to the size of the object. The following describes the procedure
for manually changing the switch area.

1 Select the object whose switch area is to be changed.

4 2 Select "Edit(E)" -> "Change switch area(A)" from the menu, and click button.
The switch area can also be changed by opening Menu by clicking the right mouse button and selecting "Change
EDIT

switch area(A)".

3 Drag from the start point to the end point of the switch area.
The switch area is changed.

Point • Switch areas cannot be changed when multiple objects are selected or grouped.
• If moving objects after altering the switch area, the switch area is automatically changed
into moving object position of objects.

Reference About the switch area


"Switch Area", page 5-23

Edit Callup Screen


Edit(A) -> Edit callup screen(Y)

You can edit the source callup screen placed on the screen currently being edited.

1 Select the screen callup to be edited.


The selection frame is displayed around the selected screen callup.

2 Either select "Edit(E)"  "Edit callup screen(Y)" from Menu in that order, or open Menu by clicking the right
mouse button and select "Edit callup screen(Y)".
The screen of the calling party is in edit state.

4-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Change Key Entry Order


Edit(E) -> Change key entry order(K)

Alter the key entry order of parts with key entry settings (numerical display, text display, message display, alarm
display, trend graph, XY-image).

Point • To distinguish parts, be sure to set individual labels to parts before you start to change the
key entry order.
• When "Alter key entry order" window is displayed, the parts even with labels set as hidden
will also be displayed.
4
1 Select "Edit(E)" -> "Change key entry order(K)" from Menu in that order.

EDIT
The "Change key entry order" window is displayed.

2 Select the label whose key entry order is to be changed, and click the " "/ " " buttons to change the key
entry order.

3 Click the "OK" button.


The key entry order is changed.

Example of how to change the key entry order

After selecting "N_00 2", Click the "OK" button.


click twice " " button.

Key entry order Key entry order

0 1

1 2

2 0

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-21


4-2 Edit Functions

Option Settings
Edit(E) -> Option settings(I)

Once option settings are set, the settings are stored held in memory even if VT STUDIO is quit.

File

Sets the default folder for saving the VTS file in advance.
4
EDIT

Item Description
VTS file save folder Sets the default folder for saving VTS files to.
VTS file for memory card
File Sets the default folder for saving VT files for Memory Card to.
save folder
User part catalog folder Save user-defined part catalogue file and set up the default of folder.
Save auto backup file into the following folders after checked.
For Windows other than XP: "C:\Users\ (User’s name)\My Documents\
KEYENCE\VTS4E"
Auto back up For Windows XP : "C:\Documents and Settings\ (User’s name)\My
Documents\KEYENCE\VTS4E"
File name is "! Auto backup file 0.vs4"*1.
Sets the timing (1 to 120 minutes) that the auto-backup file is updated.
*1 When multiple programs are started up, the last backup file to be created becomes "AutoBackup1.vs3".

4-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

DISPLAY

Set in advance the coefficient of font size of nameplate, the font size of label\device No., initial settings of memo and
display/hide of Num key for automatic adjustment.

EDIT
Item Description
Sets the font size coefficient (in range 10 to 200%, in 5% increments) when
Nameplate font size coefficient during
the nameplate font size is set to Autosize. The larger the coefficient that is
auto-sizing
set, the larger the font size becomes, and the larger the text becomes.
Font size of label Sets the font size (6 to 72) for displaying the label.
Display of label/
device No. Font size of device
Sets the font size (6 to 72) for displaying the device No.
No.
Font name Sets the font name of the text string to draw.
Font size Sets the font size (6 to 72) of the text string to draw.
Memo initial
Text color*1 Selects the text color of memos.
settings
Background color *1 Selects the background color of memos.
Frame color *1 Selects the frame color of memos.
Display numeric keypad *2 Sets display/hide of numeric keypads.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*2 For details on numeric keypads, refer to the description on the following page.

Numerical value entry keys


The numeric keypad is a window that is displayed when a menu requiring entry of a numerical value is executed. If a
number to be entered in decimal or Hex is clicked, that numerical value is displayed in the entry field.

If the selection of "Display Num key" is cancelled, the window of "Num key" will not be displayed
when executing the menu of entry value. Enter the numerical value on the keyboard of your personal
computer.

Numerical values can be entered within the range 0 to 9 in the case of decimal values and within the range 0 to F in
the case of Hex values.

Item Description
- Enters the minus sign.
. Enters the decimal point.
BS Deletes the numerical value to the left of the cursor.
CLR Deletes all entered numerical values.
Close Closes the "Num Key" window.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-23


4-2 Edit Functions

Parts attribute

Default line type, plane color, and text color when drawing graphics and text can be set in advance.

Graphics
Set the default graphic attributes for lines, continuous lines, rectangles, polygons, circles/ellipses, arcs, and fans.

4
EDIT

Item Description
Line attribute When this checkbox is marked, line type, line color and arrow can be set.
Line type*2 Selects the line type.
Line
attribute *1 Line color*2 Select the line color.
Select from "None/Start point/End point/ Both ends" for the arrow setting.
Arrows
This setting is enabled only for straight lines and continuous lines.
Plane When this checkbox is marked, the inside of the graphic is filled and the graphic is turned into a paint graphic.
Plane attribute This can be set only for rectangles, polygons, circles/ellipses, and fans.
attribute
Plane color*2 Select the color of the plane.
When this checkbox is marked, the four corners of the rectangle are rounded. This can be set
Chamfer
Chamfer only when drawing rectangles.
Radius Set the corner radius at this item.
Start angle
Arc/Fan *3 Sets the start/end angle within the range 0 to 359 deg. This can be set only for arcs and fans.
End angle
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK*2
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 When this checkbox is marked, an outer frame line is attached when drawing rectangles, polygons, circles/
ellipses, arcs, and fans.
*2 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
*3 Start/end angle
"7-1 Setting Graphics"

Style
Sets the default style of switches and lamps.

4-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Item Description
Style Selects the switch theme/style (/type).
Switch Color Selects the switch color.
Part size To set up the size of switch part.
Style Sets the lamp switch theme/style (/type).
Lamp switch Color Sets the lamp switch color.
Part size To set up the size of lamp switch part.
Style Sets the lamp theme/style (/type).
Lamp Color Sets the lamp color.
Part size To set up the size of lamp part.
Device ON display Displays the state when the lamp bit device of the lamp switch and lamp is ON. 4

EDIT
Nameplate
Sets the default nameplate setting items.

Item Description
OFF nameplate/ON To select OFF/ON for the nameplate to be set up for default value. Switch and N state lamp use
nameplate OFF nameplate settings as the default value.
Font name Set the font name of the text string in the nameplate.
Font size Set the font size of the text string in the nameplate.
Kerning Set the spacing between characters.
Position Set the placement position of the nameplate.
Set the spacing between the nameplate and lamp switch when "Position" is set to Top, Bottom,
Interval
Right or Light.
Auto-size Automatically adjusts the font size and kerning.
Text color*1 Selects the text color.
Bold font Sets the text to bold.
Text Decoration

Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Engrave Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Italic Sets the text to italic.
Underline Underlines text.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Shadow color*1
The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*1
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Align left Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the left.
Alignment

Align center Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the center.


Align right Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the right.
Even spacing Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the longest line, and evens out the character spacing.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

Reference "8-1 Setting Styles and Nameplates"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-25


4-2 Edit Functions

Outline text
Sets the default outline text setting items.

4
EDIT

Item Description
Font name Sets the font name of the text string to draw.
Rotate Select rotation angle for words from rotating towards right 0º/90º.
Direction Select the text direction from "Horizontal/Vertical".
Font size Set the font size of the text string to be drawn.
Kerning Set the spacing between characters.
Auto-size To adjust font size/character spacing automatically based on the part size settings.
Text color*1 Selects the text color.
Bold font Sets the text to bold.
Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Text Decoration

Engrave Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Italic Sets the text to italic.
Underline Underlines text.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Shadow color*1
The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*1
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Align left Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the left.
Alignment

Align center Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the center.


Align right Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the right.
Even spacing Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the longest line, and evens out the character spacing.
Part size To set up the size of outline text.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

Reference "Scaling outline fonts", page 4-4


"7-4 Setting Outline Text"

4-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Bitmap text
Sets the default bitmap text setting items.

EDIT
Item Description
Text color Selects the text color.
Bold font Sets the text to bold.
Text Decoration

Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Engrave Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
Shadow color*1
decoration. The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at
BLK*1
all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Size (V) Set the size of text strings in the vertical direction to multiples of 1/2X or within the range 1X to 8X.
Size (H) Set the size of text strings in the horizontal direction to multiples within the range 1X to 8X.
Rotate Rotates text strings clockwise by (0, 90, 180 or 270) deg.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

Reference "7-5 Setting Bitmap Text"

Numerical display
To set up the default of setting items in numerical display.

Item Description
Style Select the style to be used for display from "Basic/image frame".
Frame²
Color Select the color system of image frame.
Background
Cursor color Set the cursor color when image frame is used.
Select the fonts to be used for display from "bitmap font/stroke font/image font/Windows
Font *1
font/Extremely small font".
Text
Style This item is displayed when image font is selected. Select the style of image font.
Color Selects the color.
Part size To set up the size of numeric value display part.

*1 "6-4 About Fonts"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-27


4-2 Edit Functions

Device comments/Workspace

4
EDIT

Item Description
Display device comment When setting device after selection, device comment is displayed
beside device No. nearby deviceNo.*1
Specify device So device can be selected
In case of checked, device comment is displayed in the drop-
from device comment in the
down list during device setting.*2
drop-down list
Set up parts from the When setting device after selection by dragging and dropping in
device comment with Make selected items flicker the device comment list, the items selected in the setting window
the drag&drop operation will blink.*3
When generating multiple devices by dragging and dropping in
the device comment list, select the priority of directions for parts
Direction alignment in “X-direction/Y-direction”. In addition, after multiple
Generate parts from devices are generated, set whether or not generate after returning
to the next line/column, or the number.
the device comment
Clearance of parts Set the spacing of parts.
with the drag&drop
Parts size Set the size of switch, lamp and lamp switch.
operation
Part size settings on When this option is checked, the default value set for all parts will
priority have the priority for creation.
>>Part attributes To display "Part attributes" tab.
*1 Device comment displayed beside device No.

*2 Device comment displayed in pull-down list.

*3 The selected items blink in the device/nameplate setting window.

Reference For the details of device comment list, see "List of Device Comments", page 11-41 refer to
“Device comment list”

4-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Other

Sets the default wheel mouse settings in advance.

EDIT
Item Description
Close part catalog after When this checkbox is marked, the "Part Catalog" window is
placing part. closed after the parts are placed.
Automatically select part When selecting parts after selection from the parts icons in
catalog when configuring menu bar or tool bar, the displayed types will vary from the
Part Catalog parts. selected parts.
Set the style change function
Model replacement function can be used after selection.
to Eabled*1
Change the character When this option is checked, the character attributes of
attribute of nameplate nameplate will subject to style change.
After import screen catalog, select whether to display the
Screen catalog Display the import result
import result on "Search Result List" window.
When this checkbox is marked, select the resize reference
Outline text/ Bitmap
Resize reference point point from "Center/ Top left point/Center of left edge" for when
text
the outline text or bitmap text strings are changed.
Enable change to the device
When this checkbox is marked, the device No. can be
No. using the intelligent
Intelligent mouse changed by the intelligent mouse.
mouse.
settings
Scroll edit screen on VT When this checkbox is marked, the edit window can be
STUDIO. scrolled on VT STUDIO.
If selected, the components can be zoomed in/zoomed out
Enable "Smoothing resize" function enabled
without changing the appearance when the components
(VT3 series only)
resizing.

For the details of mode replacement function, see "Part Catalog", page 5-2 refer to “type”

Point Sometimes the intelligent mouse cannot be used depending on the mouse driver and version
of OS. Please cancel the selection in the case of abnormal operation.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-29


4-2 Edit Functions

Edit Apex
Edit apex

Edits apices of lines, continuous straight lines or polygons.

1 Click the button on the tool bar.


This operation is not required if the button is already clicked and selected.

2 Select the continuous straight line or polygon.

4 The selection frame is displayed around the selected continuous line or polygon.
EDIT

* The apices of multiple graphics cannot be edited at the same time.

3 Click the button on the tool bar. Apices can also be edited by opening Menu by clicking the right mouse
button and selecting "Edit apex".
Handles are displayed at the apices of the selected continuous straight line or polygon.

* The apices of multiple graphics cannot be edited at the same time.

4 Align the cursor with the handles of the apices to be edited and drag.

Drag

5 Either click the button on the tool bar, or cancel selection of the graphic to quit editing of apices.

4-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5
DISPLAY 5

DISPLAY
This chapter describes how to display the catalog and grid, and the functions
of the various tool bars that are displayed in windows.

5-1 About Various Display Functions•••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-2

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-1


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Part Catalog
View(V) -> Part Catalog(C) F7

Frequently used parts, such as switch lamp, numerical value display and numerical key, and commonly used images
such as basic graphics, arrow, symbol and balloon, etc, are registered to the Part catalog of VT STUDIO.

Display/hiding the "Part Catalog" window

1 Either select "View(V)" -> "Part Catalog(C)" from the menu, or click the button.
This switch displays/hides of the "Part Catalog" window.

5
DISPLAY

Item Description
Catalog Selection of catalog
Selects the Part catalog file. Set the Part catalog file name after clicking the Part
File selection catalog replacement button.
Color system Selects the color.
New Part catalog Creates a new Part catalog file.
Rename Part catalog Renames the Part catalog file.
Name Sets (changes) the name of the currently selected part.
Delete Deletes the currently selected part.
Close Part catalog after
If the button is pressed and held, close "Part catalog" window after placing parts.
placing part. *1
Automatic selection of catalog If the button is pressed and held, the Part catalogs displayed may vary with the
when placing parts.*1 selected parts when selected from the parts icons of menu bar or tool bar.
Effective/ineffective switching
If the button is pressed and held, the style change function is effective.
of style change function.*1
This is used to decide whether
nameplate character The character attribute of nameplate will be changed if this button is pressed during the
attributes are changed at the style change.
time of style change. *1
Select the display size for the part from magnification/display all/ suitable for window
Zoom
width.
Individual ON/OFF The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for
graphics attribute control in ON/OFF state are displayed individually according to the
display of device preview display settings.
The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for
Device ON display
graphics attribute control ON state are displayed.
The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for
Device OFF display
graphics attribute control OFF state are displayed.
State No. Switches the display state No. of N state lamps.
Display text string ID witches and displays the display text string ID (0 to 7) for parts, etc.

*1 "Option Settings", page 4-22

5-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Point All settings are saved when switches/lamps, basic part, meters/graphs, etc. are registered as
parts to the Part catalog. Note, however, that devices must be reset when parts have been
placed on files to which a target PLC different from the target PLC at registration is set.

Reference The graphics catalogs in VT STUDIO and VT BUILDER (basic image, arrow, symbol and balloon) are
incorporated into the part catalogs.

Placing parts from the "Part Catalog" window


Parts installed on VTSTUDIO are categorized by type and registered to the Part catalog.
The parts displayed in Part catalog windows can be displayed according to actual size placed on the edit
window(multiplying factor of 100%).
Parts can be easily placed on the Edit window merely by dragging-and-dropping the desired part from the "Part
Catalog" window.
5

DISPLAY
Dragging

Registering parts to the "Part Catalog" window


Parts can be easily registered to the Part catalog merely by dragging-and-dropping them on the "Part Catalog"
window from the Edit window. If original parts that you made or frequently used parts are registered to the Part
catalog file, they can be placed on the Edit window merely by dragging-and-dropping them from the "Part Catalog"
window.

Dragging

Point If it is impossible to register to system Part catalog files, please recreate the Part catalog files
and register the parts to them.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-3


5-1 About Various Display Functions

 User-defined
User-defined file logged in advance is opened first when logging part in Part catalogue window.

5
Item Description
New catalog file To new a Part catalog file in the user-defined folder.
Download Use Internet Explorer to open the home page for Part catalog download.
DISPLAY

Select folder To select the folder for saving Part catalog file.

Style change function


If type replacement function is used, the type of parts placed on edit screen can be changed in batch to the same type
of parts registered to the Part catalog.

1 Make the parts to which the types shall be changed in a selected state in edit screen.

2 Click the parts in Part catalog window.


The types of parts in Part catalog window will be copied to the types of parts selected in edit screen.

Notices to style change function


• The object parts of type replacement function are shown below.
• switch • lamp • lamp switch
• decorative frame • numerical display • text display
• message display • alarm display • trend graph
• XY graph • statistic chart • meter
• outline text • bitmap text

• If the parts selected in edit window and Part catalog window have the same category, the type will be change.
• If multiple parts are selected in edit window, only the parts of the same category with those selected in Part catalog
window will be changed in batch.
• If grouped parts or worksheet parts are selected, the types of grouped parts and parts in the worksheet will be
changed in batch.
• For the parts selected in Part catalog window, the types can be changed only when a single part is registered to the
Part catalog. However, the types cannot be changed when grouped or multiple parts are incorporated and
registered to Part catalog.
• In type replacement function, the setting items related to appearance, such as color and images, will be copied.
However, some items cannot be copied depending upon the parts. Please check the settings after type
replacement function is used.
• The size of parts cannot be copied.The parts with changed types will be reset based on original size of parts.
However, when the settings of Windows font are copied, the size of fonts will also be copied, so the size of parts
may vary with the size of fonts.

5-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Screen catalog
View(V) -> Screen catalog(F)

Special screens for various equipment connected, as well as menus, bit monitors, word monitors, alarm log, and
tread graphs used frequently are registered in the screen catalog of VT STUDIO.

Display/hide the "Screen catalog" window.

1 Select “View(V)” -> “Screen catalog(F)” from the menu, and click the button.
To display/hide the "Screen catalog" window.

DISPLAY
Item Description
Category Select the category of screen catalog.

Download Use Internet Explorer to open the home page for screen catalog download.

To select a screen catalog file.


Select file
Select topics. This is enabled only when multiple categories exist in the same
Topics
screen catalog.
Description To display the description of each screen catalog.
Once this option is checked, the resolution will be changed according on the
Resize screen based on resolution
"VT model settings" at the time of screen catalog import.
Once this option is checked, a backup file will be created before screen
Create backup file
catalog is imported. Click the "..." button to set up the folder for file saving.
Preview is possible in the "View mode" window. Alternatively, you can double
Preview
click the thumbnail display to switch to the Preview screen.
To use screen catalog, open the ladder diagram enclosed. This is displayed
Open ladder diagram
only when an enclosed ladder diagram exists.
To display the PDF file including details description and usage of screen
Help
catalog.
Import Execute import.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-5


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Preview
Preview is possible in the "View mode" window.
Double click the "Screen list" button to display screens list. Switch to the "Screen catalog preview" window.
For more information, refer to "View Mode", page 5-28.

5
DISPLAY

Import screen catalog

1 Select an screen catalog to be imported and click the ìImportî button.


Alternatively, you can import by dragging and dropping the screen catalog to the edit screen.

Reference • In case no screen file is opened, please set up VT model and PLC model before import.
• When MultiTalk settings exist in the screen or PLCs whose station No. is setup are contained, the
"PLC model settings" window will be displayed. Please select an import destination.

If auto replacement of device is available for screen catalog due to integration with KV STUDIO, the "Import - KV
STUDIO integration" window will be displayed.

2 Select an item to be integrated and click the "Execute" button.

5-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Item Description
Current KV STUDIO Integrate with the current KV STUDIO.
KV STUDIO project Specify one project in KV STUDIO and then integrate the same.

Unit configurations in VT STUDIO. To use unit configurations saved in the screen file of VT STUDIO.
Not to integrate with KV STUDIO Import without integration.
Device comments Check this option to read the device comments.
Read the buffer memory
Check this option to read the buffer comments of expansion unit. Only for
comments of expansion
KV STUDIO Ver.5.5 or higher.
Read unit.
settings Read the comments of Check this option to read the comments of internal device (MW/MB) and
internal device/link device link device (LNW/LNB) on VT.

Unit configurations
Read unit configurations when KV STUDIO Ver.6 or higher is used for
integrating with "Current KV STUDIO" and "KV STUDIO project". 5
In case any item is overwritten, the following window is displayed.

DISPLAY
3 Confirm the overwrites, and click the "OK" button if no problem.

To confirm the details, please click the "Confirm details" button.

4 If the following window is displayed, click the "Read" button.

In case of details setting, or in case a message in red color is displayed due to, for example, duplicated devices,
please click the "Detailed settings" button.
For more information about advanced settings, See "Import", page 3-9.

5 After import is completed, window will be displayed, select whether to display the import result.

Select "Yes", then "search result list" window will display the import result.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-7


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Tool bar
View(V) -> Tool bar(T)

This switches display/hide of the tool bar.


Commonly used menu functions are summarized into the tool bar.
The displayed tool bar can be placed on the screen as a window by
dragging-and-dropping, or as a part of edit window by embedding into
upper, lower, left and right of edit window.
Display/hide of each tool bar can be selected by selecting "View(V)" ->
"Tool bar(T)".

5 The tool bar is displayed by marking the checkbox of the tool bar to be
displayed.
DISPLAY

Standard

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Standard(N)

Each of the functions of the File menu can be operated by buttons.

Item Description
New Creates a new file.
Open Opens existing files.
Save Saves edited files.
Import Import screens and system settings from the existing screen data.
Cut Cuts the selected object.
Copy Copies the selected object.
Paste Re-places the copied object on screen.
Undo The previous operation is undone.
Redo Redoes the operation undone by the "Undo" button.
Print Prints the screen of the currently edited file or lists.
Add or Remove
Select the buttons to be displayed.
buttons

5-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Screen

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Screen(S)

Specification of page No., global window No. and printer form page No. to edit, and specification of base/window
screens can be performed by button operation. New pages can also be made by button operation.

Item Description
New screen Creates a new base screen, window screen or printer form screen.

5
Screen attribute Sets the attributes (e.g. background color) of the base screen, window screen or printer form
settings screen.

Calls up a specified existing page No. global window No., or printer form screen page No.
Page No., Page comment

DISPLAY
Next page Calls up an existing next page.
Previous page Calls up an existing previous page.
Acfive Edit
Switch active edit Eabled/disabled.
Eabled /disabled
Previous screen Return to the previous screen. This operation can be performed for 20 times.
Edit base Sets the base (screen) ready for editing.
Edit window 1 Sets window 1 (screen) ready for editing.
Edit window 2 Sets window 2 (screen) ready for editing.
Edit window 3 Sets window 3 (screen) ready for editing.
Page configuration
Displays the "Page configuration management" window.
management
Add or remove
Select the buttons to be displayed
buttons

Switch/Lamp

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Switches/Lamps(L)

Placing of lamp switches, lamps and switches can be operated by buttons.

Item Description
Switch Place switches.
Lamp switch Place lamp switches.
Lamp Place lamps.
N state lamp Place N state lamps.
N state parts Place N start parts.
Cross-key Place cross-key(only VT3-V7R)
Function switch Configure function switch. (Only for the VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G))
Add or remove
Select the buttons to be displayed
buttons

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-9


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Parts

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Parts(P)

Press the buttons to configure the basic parts (numerical display, text display, message display and alarm display),
bar graph meter, trend graph/meter.

Item Description
Numerical value display Places numerical value displays.

5
Text display Places text displays.
Message display Places message displays.
Basic part

Alarm display Places alarm displays.


DISPLAY

Video display Places video displays.


Animation display Place animation display
Function control by devices Places function control by devices.
BMP file switching Places BMP file switches.
VNC display Configure VNC display.
Bar graph meter Places bar graph meters.
Pie chart meter Places pie chart meters.
Fan meter Places fan meters.
Meta/Graphs

Statistical bar graph


Places statistical bar graph meters.
meter
Statistical pie chart
Places statistical pie chart meter
meter
Trend Graph Places trend graphs.
XY graphs Place XY graph
Add or remove buttons Select the buttons to be displayed

Graphics

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Graphics(F)

Screen drawing functions can be operated by buttons.

Item Description
Line Draws straight lines.
Continuous lines Draws continuous straight lines.
Rectangles Draws rectangles and paint rectangles.
Polygons Draws polygons and paint polygons.
Graphics

Circles/Ellipses Draws circles/ellipses and paint circles/ellipses.


Arc Draws arcs.
Fan Draws fans and paint fans.
Image Pastes Windows bitmap format or JPEG format image files to the screen.
Decorative frames Places decorative frames.
Outline text Draws text using Windows outline fonts.
Text

Bitmap text Write with embedded fonts.


Memo Places memos.
Load DXF file Loads DXF files saved in AutoCAD as drawn graphics.
Ruled line Create ruled lines.
Table Create table.
Call up screen Calls up specified screens for use in other screens.
Add or remove buttons Select the buttons to be displayed

5-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Control/Edit

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Control/Edit(C)

Setting of part attributes, swapping the order (front/back) of selected objects, and alignment of multiple selected
objects can be operated by buttons.

Item Description
Select one of
Select one object at a time in order from multiple selected objects.
mulfiple parts
Select parts
Parts Attribute
Selects objects. 5
Changes the settings of switches/lamps, basic parts and meters/graphs.
Settings

DISPLAY
Graphic attribute
Sets the graphic attribute controls to drawn graphics, outline text, bitmap text, and images.
controls
Change switch area Changes the switch area.
Rotate Rotates selected drawn graphics clockwise in 90 deg. increments.
Flip horizontal Flips selected object(s) horizontally.
Flip vertical Flips selected object(s) vertically.
Edit Apex Edits the apices of selected straight lines, continuous straight lines and polygons.
Move to front Moves the selected object to the front.
Move to back Moves the selected object to the back.
Move to front Moves the selected object forwards.
Move backward Moves the selected object backwards.
Group Groups multiple objects into a single object.
Ungroup Ungroups a grouped object to the original multiple objects.
Place/Align Aligns multiple selected objects.
Add or remove
Select the buttons to be displayed
buttons

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-11


5-1 About Various Display Functions

View

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> View(V)

Changing of the screen display can be operated by buttons.

Item Description

5 Enlarge display
Reduce display
Enlarges the display of the edit window.
Reduces the display of the edit window.
Display
Select display magnification for edit window.
DISPLAY

magnification
Set grid Sets the grid display spacing and color.
Individual display The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for graphics attribute
ON/OFF control in ON/OFF state are displayed individually according to the preview display settings.
All devices display Displays the state when lamp bit devices for lamps and lamp switches, and reference bit
ON devices in graphic attribute control are ON in the edit window.
All devices display Displays the state when lamp bit devices for lamps and lamp switches, and reference bit
OFF devices in graphic attribute control are OFF in the edit window.
State No. Switches and displays the state No. of N state lamps and N state parts in the edit window.

Switches and displays the display text string ID (0 to 7) for parts, etc. in the edit window.
Display text string ID
Displays the screen (base, window 1, 2 and 3), interrupt window, and global window on the
Overlap other screen
same page as the screen currently being edited overlapped.
View Mode Displays the "View mode" window.
Screen "Screen" window is displayed in workspace.
System setting "System setting" window is displayed in workspace.
Seach result list Display seach result list
Text string list Display text string list
Device comment list Display device comment list
Operating log list Display operating log list
Part catalog Displays the Part Catalog window.
Screen catalog Display the "Screen catalog" window.
Add or remove
Select the buttons to be displayed.
buttons

5-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Position/Size

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Position/size(O)

You can change the position or size of currently selected objects.

Start X coordinate Start Y coordinate End X coordinate End Y coordinate X-axis size Y-axis size

Item Description
Displays the start x coordinates of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a
Start X coordinate
numeric value, the object moves in the X direction.

Start Y coordinate
Displays the start y coordinates of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a
numeric value, the object moves in the Y direction. 5
Displays the end x coordinates of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a

DISPLAY
End X coordinate numeric value, the object moves in the X direction, and the object is resized in the X direction.
The start coordinates do not move.
Displays the end y coordinates of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a
End Y coordinate numeric value, the object moves in the Y direction, and the object is resized in the Y direction.
The start coordinates do not move.
Displays the X direction size of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a numeric value, the
X-axis size
object moves in the X direction, and the object is resized in the X direction. The start coordinates do not move.
Displays the Y direction size of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a numeric value, the object
Y-axis size
moves in the Y direction, and the object is resized in the Y direction. The start coordinates do not move.

(0,0)
(Start X coordinate, start Y coordinate)

Y-axis size

X-axis size
(End X coordinate, end Y coordinate)

Communications

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Communication(C)

Set the sending/receiving of data or communication.

Item Description
Send all data Sends edited screen data and PLC data folder data to the VT3.
Different-send screen
Send the changed screen data to VT3.
data
Receive all data Receives screen data or PLC data folder data saved to the VT3 on the PC.
Compare all data Verifies the data on the VT3 with the data currently being edited on the PC.
All Data Check Perform data check for all data.
Communications settings Perform setting related to communication
Serial port Enable communication via VT3 with serial interface.
USB Enable communication via VT3 with USB interface.
ETHERNET Enable communication via VT3 with Ethernet.
Remote COM port tool Start Remote COM port tool.
Display/hide buttons Select the buttons to be displayed
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-13
5-1 About Various Display Functions

Guideline

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Guideline

Display/hide guideline and display position for the guideline can be selected.

Items Description
Display/hide Switch to display/hide for guideline.
Left Align display guideline on the left of configurated objects.
Right Align display guideline on the right of configurated objects.

5 Top
Bottem
Align display guideline at the top of configurated objects.
Align display guideline at the bottem of configurated objects.
Center width Align display guideline at the center of object width.
DISPLAY

Center height Align display guideline at the center of the configured object height.

Status bar
View(V) -> Status bar(B)

This switches display/hide of the status bar.


The status bar displays the following details:
• Explanation of currently selected functions, key state
• Information (type, position, size, label) of the currently selected object
• Name of selected VT models (number of colors also displayed for VT3-Q5M/W4M*/W4G*)
• Name of PLC manufacturers and models (MultiTalk displayed if MultiTalk function is used)
• On-screen cursor coordinates

Point • Double click the VT model to display the "VT model settings" window.
• Double click the PLC vendor and model to display the "PLC model settings" window.

5-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Workspace
This switch displays/hides of the work space.
The workspace contains the following contents.
• Screen • System settings • Find result list
• Text string list • Device comment • Operating log

Screen

View(V) -> Workspace(W) -> Picture(P)

This panel allows you to view the configuration of screens made on each page, and to perform copy, delete and other
editing operations on the screens you have made.
5

DISPLAY
Item Description
New screen Opens the "New screen" window to make a new screen.
Screen attribute
Opens the "Screen attribute settings" window to change the attributes of the specified screen.
settings
Copy Copies the specified screen.
Paste Pastes the copied screen to the specified base screen, window screen, or form screen.
Deletes the screens on the specified pages, and moves the deleted screens to Trash. Screens
Delete
you have deleted are moved to Trash.
When "Open Import File" is opened, the file containing the screen to import is selected, the
"Page configuration management" window is displayed. The screen list is divided into two
Import screen *1
parts, upper and lower, and the list of screens in the import file are displayed in the lower screen
list. Copy the screen ID from the screen list of import files, and paste it to the upper screen list.
Switch display Switches between the list display and image display.
Page configuration
Displays the "Page configuration management" window.
management
Switch display Changes the type of screen, page No. (global window No.), comments, etc.
Link copy Makes a link for the copied screen. This item cannot be used on form screens.
Clear trash Completely deletes screens in Trash.
*1 "Importing screens", page 12-55. To import system settings, select File(F) -> Import(I) from the menu.
Right click menu, and add the following operations.
Item Description
Unfold all Unfold the selected items.
Fold all Fold the selected items.

The same operations can be performed from Menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button.

Point • The window screen cannot be copied and pasted to base screen, nor base screen be copied and
pasted to window screen. (Pasting between local windows and global windows is possible.)
• Copying and pasting between the Printer form screen and regular screens(base screen, window
screens) is not possible. (Copying and pasting between printer form screens is possible.)

Reference • Deletion in 1 page units


If you click "Page No." with the right mouse button, and select “Delete” from the menu that is
displayed, you can delete all screens (base/windows 1, 2, 3) on the selected page.
• The following components can be generated when dragging and dropping screen in workspace to drawing window.
• Base screen : components with page switching function and screen calling function set
• Window 1/2/3 : components with local window display set
• Global window : components with global window display set
• Form screen : components with the print start trigger bit device of form screen set
• When pressing the F2 key on the page No., the "Page comment setting" window will appear.
"12-11 Screen Configuration Management", Page 12-53

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-15


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Page No.

Screen ID

• Display of "Screen attribute settings" window


5 You can display the "Screen attribute settings" window by double-clicking "Screen ID".
• Switch pages with cursor key
After the screen window is activated, if you click the up/down cursor key (/), the screen will be
DISPLAY

switched and displayed corresponding to position of the cursor. In addition, edit window can be
activated by pressing "Enter" when cursors are aligned.
• Move "Screen ID" by dragging and dropping
"Screen ID" can be moved to any position by dragging and dropping in workplace.

Change page
 Individual change of screen ID/global window No.
Select "Change page(G)" from the right-click menu of screen ID (the global window No.) to display the "Change
page" window.
• The page No. of screen will be changed when the page is changed via screen ID.
• The global window No. and local window can not be changed when page is changed via screen ID of global
window.
• Only the page No.of form screen will be changed when page is changed via screen ID of form screen.

 Batch change page No.


Select "Change page(G)" from right-click menu of page No. to display the "Move and duplicate page" window.
• When page is changed, all page No.s of the screens (Base, Window 1/2/3) on that page will be changed.

5-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

• After page is changed, for the components (Page Switch (page No. specifying), Local window display, global
window display) referring page to be changed , a window for confirming whether the change is followed will be
displayed. If you select "Yes", then the above settings will also be changed along with the page change operation.

Trash
Screens you have deleted are moved to Trash. Screens in Trash can be re-used by copy-and-paste. The screens in Trash
can be completely deleted by clicking "Clear trash" in the menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button. 5
Up to ten of the latest deleted screens remain in Trash.

DISPLAY
System setting

View(V) -> Workspace(W) -> System setting(S)

Set up the "VT system settings", "Global function switch (only for VT3-
V6H(G)/Q5H(G))", "Device comments", "Trend graph", "Alarm",
"Message", "Windows fonts", "Device transfer", "Global function control",
"PLC data folder", "Worksheet ", and "Ladder monitor".

For the details, refer to the following chapters.


"Chapter 9 SETTING BASIC PARTS"
"Chapter 10 SETTING METERS & IMAGES"
"Chapter 12 RESOURCE"
"Chapter 15 PLC DATA FOLDER"
"Chapter 16 WORKSHEET"

Seach result list

View(V) -> Workspace(W) -> Seach result list(L)

The seach result list can also be displayed using the following methods.
• Select "Edit(E)"->"Find(X)" from the menu.
• Open the menu with right mouse button, and select "Seach(H)".
• Open the menu with right mouse button, and select "Seach result list(I)".

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-17


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Item Description
To select the list page. The import result is displayed upon the completion of a screen
Page(P)
catalog or normal import.
Target range Selects the window to be displayed as a list.
Window(W)
Import result To display import result upon complete of screen catalog or normal import
Display system settings Check this option to display system settings.
Seach(S)*1 Display "Seach" window after clicking.
After clicking, display the setting window of selected parts in the list. When selecting the
Change settings(T) parts of multiple types, *3 parts attribute settings can be edited in batch.
When selecting screen attribute, display "screen attribute setting" window.
Display “Device batch change” window after clicking. The devices selected in the list can
Batch change devices(D)*4 be changed in batch.
Screen/system settings*2 Display the page number.
Screen ID Display screen ID.
5 Coordinate*2
Description*2
Display the coordinate of configuration.
Display the types of parts.
DISPLAY

Device Display devices set on parts.


Setting details Display contents set on parts.

*1 "Search", page 4-11


*2 Sequencing is allowed.
*3 "11-9 Batch Edition of the Part Attributes"
*4 Set devices changed in “Device batch change” and click “OK” button.

Seach result list and operations in edit window


• After selecting parts from edit window, the corresponding part columns in search result list are shown in bold fonts.
• After deleting parts from edit window, the search result list is also deleted.
• After selecting parts from search result list, the edit window is switched, and the parts are turned into selected
status.
• After deleting ( key) parts from search result list, the edit window is also deleted.
• In search result list, continuous lines can be selected by pressing and clicking key.
• In search result list, discontinuous lines can be selected by pressing and clicking key.
• In the search result list, all search results may be selected by pressing + A , or [Select ALL (L)] on the right-
click menu.
• In search result list, press +  or  to jump to the following item
• The "Display/hide column(U)" in the right-click menu can be used to display/hide the "Screen ID" and
"Coordinates" columns.
• The "Unfold all indexes/fold all indexes" in the right-click menu can be use to display/hide details in a batch
fashion.

5-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Text string list

View(V) -> Workspace(W) -> Text string list(M)

Extract text string data from screen data to display in the list. You’re allowed to edit text string on the displayed "Text
string list" window. The screen can be edited in edit window under the list window.

5
Item Description

DISPLAY
Page(P) Select the page displaying text string.After that, display after filtering.
Window(W) Select the window displaying text string. After that, display after filtering.
Parts(S)*1 Select the parts showing text string. After that, display after filtering.
Copy Copy the selected cell and text string.
Paste Paste the copied cell and text string.
Search Display "Search/replace in the text string list" window.
Import Display “import to text string list” window, and select the files of text string list to be imported.
Export Display “export to text string list” window, and export the displayed text string list to the files.
Display text string list. If selecting parts on the list, the edit window will be switched to the page or window
Text string list
placed with selected parts, and the parts are selected.The text strings can also be changed on the list.
Multiple ON(N)*3 To set the "Multiple" check for selected part to ON in a batch form.
Multiple OFF(O)*3 To set the "Multiple" check for selected part to OFF in a batch form.

*1 The selectable parts are bitmap text, outline text, nameplate (switch, lamp, lamp switch, N state parts, N state
lamp), alarming parts (state display character strings, item names) and screen attributes (screen ID).
*2 The text files of CSV format or UNICODE can be imported/exported.
Export the text strings of all parts in the screen data.
*3 Multiple ON/OFF is available only in the right-click menu of character string list.

Reference If double-clicking the text strings on the text string list, the cursor blinks, and the text strings can be
edited. The changed contents on the list will be reflected into parts on edit screen. In addition, the
changed parts on edit screen will also be reflected into the contents on list.

 "Search/replace text string list" window


Through the "Find/replace the text string list" window, text strings can be searched and replaced with “Search/replace
text string list“ window.

"Search" "replace"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-19


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Items Description
Input the text string to be searched or the text string before replacing. Even for character strings
Search text string(T)
that contain line feed, line feed will also be included in the search.
Input the text string after replacing. After replacement, if the character string needs to contain
Replace text string(W)
line feed, Alt + Enter may be used for line feed of the replaced character string.
Rearch direction(D) Select the seach/replace direction.
Replace all(A) Batch replace the text strings as objects.
Individually replacement for the text strings as objects. When you don't want to replace it, click
Replace(R)
"Search next", and the cursor will move to the next text string.
Search next(N) Search as the specified direction of "Search direction".
Close(C) Close the "Search/replace text string list" window.

Reference In the "Text string list" window, after you click " Ctrl + F " or " Ctrl + H " with any item selected, the
selected text string will be listed in the "Search text strings", and the "Search/replace in the text string
5 list" will be displayed.
DISPLAY

Example of formats of text string list


The text string list can be imported/exported to CSV files(*.csv) or text files(*.txt). The format of CSV files is as
follows.

Import CSV files Export CSV files

If the exported files are imported again, please edit only the text strings set in the parts.

5-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Device comment list

View(V) -> Workspace(W) -> Device comment list(D)

The following functions can be realized by reading into VT STUDIO the device
comment used in ladder diagram program:
• Look up device comment during device setting.
• Find in device comment.
• Look up device comment from find result list.
• Set parts (nameplate and device settings) from device comment list.
• Generate parts (switch, lamp, lamp switch, numerical display, text
display, outline fonts) from device comment list.
• The unit enables filter display.
(For KV-7000 Series or KV-5500/5000/3000 Series PLC models
5
incorporating KV STUDIO Ver. 6.0 or later unit architecture data.)

DISPLAY
* KV-7000 Series supports KV STUDIO Ver. 8 and later versions.

For device comment details, see


"11-10 Device Comments"

Operating log list

View(V) -> Workspace(W) -> Operating log list(G)

The operating log files to be saved into memory card as CSV files or UNICODE text files are read into VT STUDIO, which
are used to find screen data and check the log.

About details of operating log, see


"11-11 Operation Log"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-21


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Switch grid/Grid

Switch Grid

View (V) -> Switch grid (S)

This switches display/hide of the switch grid.


Switch areas of objects having touch switches such as lamp
switches and switches are placed at all times to snap to the
switch grid.

5 Point • The spacing among switch grids is set


as 16 dots in longitudinal and horizontal
direction and can't be changed.
DISPLAY

• When "VT model setting" is VT3-V6H,


VT3-Q5H, VT3-W4T*, VT3-W4M*/M4G*,
the switch grids will not be displayed. Switch Grid Grid

Grid

View(V) -> Grid(G)

This switches display/hide of the grid.


The grid is used a reference point for aiding you when making screens.

Set grid
View(V) -> Set grid(R)

Sets the grid that is used as the reference point for aiding you in making screens in the edit window.

Item Description
Set the horizontal and vertical grid spacing in the edit window as a number of dots. Set the spacing
Grid spacing in the vertical direction as the Y coordinate, and the spacing in the horizontal direction as the X
coordinate. The setting range is 1 or more in both and X and Y directions. The default is "X=4, Y=4".
Grid color *1 Select the grid color.
Set the grid spacing to the same size (X=2 and Y=2 for VT3-W4 series, otherwise X=16 and Y=16)
Switch grid size
as the switch grid.
When this checkbox is marked, drawing and movement of objects is aligned with the grid in the edit window.
Snap to grid When snap to grid is set to ON, graphics are drawn aligned to the grid. In the default setting, this checkbox
is marked.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

Point When grid spacing is set to "X=1, Y=1", the created screen cannot be checked.

Reference If the setting of “as per grid” is temporarily cancelled when moving parts and zooming, the setting of
“as per grid” will be contrary to current setting after pressing key .
That’s to say, if selecting “as per grid”, the settings will be cancelled temporarily after pressing keya; if
not selecting “as per grid”, the settings will be effective temporarily after pressing key .

5-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Guide line
View(V)->Guide line(I) ->Display/Hide(S)
->Left(L)
->Right(R)
->Upper(T)
->Lower(B)
->Center of width (W)
->Center of height(H)

Display the guide line to facilitate placing/arrangement of parts.


Select the position of displaying/hiding guide line and displaying guide line.

5
Guide line

DISPLAY
Point When "as per grid" and guide line in the grid settings are selected, the reference line is at
priority.

Switch Area
View(V) -> Switch area(A)

Switches display/hide of switch areas having touch switches such as lamp switches and switches.
The switch area represents the effective area as touch switch.
"6-2 About Touch Switches"

Switch area

Moving switch areas


Switches are always set to snap to the switch grid.
When objects are moved, switch areas snap to the switch grid interlocked with movement of objects.
Switch areas cannot be moved by themselves. Set the switch area again when the switch area is changed.
"Changing the Switch Area", page 4-20

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-23


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Scale Display

+ numerical key (zoom in)


View(V) -> Zoom display(M) F5 (Display all)
+ numerical key (zoom out)

Zooms (zoom in/zoom out) the display screen. Zoom out the display when viewing an overview of the entire display screen
or when the object is moved over the entire display area, and zoom in the display when the graphic is to be drawn in detail.

Zooming by menu:
Select "View(V)" -> "Zoom display(M)" from the menu, and select the zooming
ratio.
8 types of magnification are available: 50%, 75%, 100%, 150%, 200%, 300%,
5 400%, display all.
Resize according to edit window size when set to display all.
DISPLAY

Zooming by tool bar: Enlarge display button Reduce display button


Clicking the button increases the zooming ratio by one
step, and clicking the button decreases the zooming ratio
by one step.

Reference • Objects are enlarged referenced to the center of the object if the displayed is enlarged with the object selected.
• zooming is also impossible by key + mouse roller

Scroll Edit Window


Move cursor after right clicking edit window
Cursor will become hand-shaped when right clicking edit window.
Edit window can be scrolled by dragging.

Point It is impossible to scroll edit window when executing the following functions.
• When dragging component and window
• When changing component size by dragging
• When selecting the created component from the menu bar or the tool bar and determining
its size
• When changing switch area
• When coping/pasting a component within the same page No. and determining the pasting
destination
• When apexes are determined for a polygon component
• When selecting cells of a form for a form creation component
• When using the auto-fill function for a form creation component

Select and Edit Screen


Display(V)->Select Edit Screen(E) -> Base(B) +
-> Window1(1) +
-> Window 2(2) +
-> Window3(3) +

5-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Edit base

A "base" is the screen that is always displayed when the page is switched.
Select the base as follows when placing graphics or text on bases for editing.

1 Either select "View(V)" -> "Select edit screen(E)" -> "Base(B)" from the menu, or click the button.
The button is pressed, and the base can be edited.

Point The button will remain pressed if the page you are making contains only the base.
Clicking this button again will not change this state.

For details on editing graphics and text you have made, refer to the respective descriptions below.

Edit windows 1, 2 and 3 5

DISPLAY
A "window" is the screen that is displayed overlapping the base.
To edit windows 1, 2 or 3, select windows 1, 2 or 3 as follows.

1 Select "view(V)"->"Select edit screen(E)"


-> “Window1(1)/Window2(2)/Window3(3)", or click
/ / button from the the menu.
• The "New screen" window is displayed.
• When windows 1 to 3 have been created, “New screen”
window isn’t displayed.
• When existing windows 1 to 3 are hidden, change them
into display status by clicking / / button.

2 Set the screen ID and background color of the window to be created.


"12-1 New Screen"

3 The selected window is displayed and can be edited.

For details on editing graphics and text you have made, refer to the respective descriptions below.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-25


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Overlap Other Screen


View(V) -> Overlap other screen(P)

Displays the screen currently being edited overlapping other screens.


You can edit screens while viewing how the base screen and window screens overlap each other.

Select the screen to overlap from the screens (base, windows 1,


2 or 3) on the same page, interrupt window, and global windows.

5
DISPLAY

Point The screen to overlap will be displayed on the background plane. Please confirm on VT3 if
displayed images differ from actual display.

Reference •When "Overlap other screen" is selected during execution of "Overlap other screen", "Overlap other screen" will be
released.
•When "Overlap other screen" is selected with " Shift " key pressed during execution of "Overlap other screen", the
"Overlap other screen" window will be displayed.

Active Edit
View(V) -> Active edit(Q) +

Switch effective/ineffective Active edit

Reference "11-7 Active Edit"

Label
View(V) -> Label(L) F8

Switches display/hide of labels that are attached to drawn graphics to which switches/lamps, basic parts, meters/
graphs, and graphic attribute controls are set in the edit window.
Labels are used for displaying or printing a list of drawn graphics to which switches/lamps, basic parts, meters/
graphs, and graphic attribute controls are set.
Label default settings

Item Default Item Default


Switch T_**** Animation display Anm_****
Lamp switch Ls_**** Function control by devices Df_****
Lamp Lp_**** BMP file switching Im_****
N state lamp NsL_**** VNC display Vn_****
N state parts NsP_**** Bar graph meter Bm_****
cross-key Ck_**** Pie chart meter Cm_****
Graphic attribute controls L_**** Fan meter Sm_****
Numerical value display N_**** Statistical bar graph meter Bs_****
Text display S_**** Statistical pie chart meter Cs_****
Message display Mb_**** Trend Graph Tg_****
Alarm display Ab_**** XY graph Xg_****
Video display Vid_****
**** stands for the created number. A number starting from 0000 is appended.
5-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
5-1 About Various Display Functions

Entering labels
Labels can be changed as desired from the default settings. Enter labels as follows:

Entering labels in each setting screen:


In various setting screens of switch•lamp, basic parts, meter•graph and screen
attribute control, enter full-width characters within 16 characters or half-width
English digits within 32 characters.

Entering labels in the "Label settings" window:


If double-clicking label in the edit window, the “îlabel settingî” window will be
displayed.
Enter the label and click the "OK" button.

Reference Font size of label


5
"Option Settings", page 4-22

DISPLAY
Device No.
View(V) -> Device No. (D)

Displays/hides device Nos. set to drawn graphics to which switches/lamps, basic parts, meters/graphs, and graphic
attribute controls placed in the edit window have been set.
Also, the "Parts settings" window is displayed by double-clicking the device No. displayed in the edit window. In this
window, the type of target (reference) device and device No. can be set.

Reference Font size of device No.


"Option Settings", page 4-22
Å@

Memo
View(V) -> Memo(O)

Displays/hides memos placed in the edit window.


Memos are used to taken and paste notes you want to remember while you are making screens.

Reference "7-6 Setting Memos"

Device ON/OFF Display


View(V) ->Device ON/OFF display(Q) ->Display ON/OFF
View(V) ->Device display ON/OFF(Q) ->Individual device ON/OFF display(I);
View(V) ->Device display ON/OFF(Q) ->Device display ON(N)
View(V) ->Device display ON/OFF(Q) ->Device display OFF(F)

Individual device display ON/OFF


The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for graphics attribute control in ON/OFF
state are displayed individually according to the preview display settings.

Reference • The lamp and lamp switch will be displayed according to ON/OFF settings on ìnameplateî labels of “attribute”
window.
• Screen attribute control is displayed according to preview display settings on “Screen attribute control”
window.

Device display ON/Device display OFF


Displays the state when lamp bit devices for lamps and lamp switches, and reference bit devices in graphic attribute
control are ON/OFF in the edit window.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-27


5-1 About Various Display Functions

View Mode
View(V) -> View mode(V)

Displays the screen in the View mode. The View mode is used for confirming the display image of the edited screen
on the VT3 and the output image in printing of the printer form.

5
DISPLAY

Item Description
Save the displayed menu as lattice (BMP) file or JPEG file.
Initial value of the file name is as follows.
Basic menu/local window: <File Name> <Page No (.4 bit)>.bmp (JPG)
Save image on the Example: VT3 menu 0000.bmp
Global window : <File Name> <Global window No (.G+3 bit)>.bmp (JPG)
menu Example: VT3 menu G000.bmp
Form menu : <File Name> <Page No (.P+2 bit)>.bmp (JPG)
Example: VT3 menu_P00.bmp
Ctrl + S may also be used to execute the same operation.
Page No. Calls up a specific existing page No.
Next page Calls up an existing next page.
Previous page Calls up an existing previous page.
Zoom in display Enlarges the display screen to a higher display ratio.
Zoom out display Reduces the display screen to a lower display ratio.
Switch ON display Displays the state in which a switch and lamp switch touch switch is touched.
Individual ON/ The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for graphics
attribute control in ON/OFF state are displayed individually according to the preview display
OFF settings.
Displays the state when lamp bit devices for lamps and lamp switches, and reference bit
Device ON display
devices in graphic attribute control are ON in the edit window.
Displays the state when lamp bit devices for lamps and lamp switches, and reference bit
Device OFF display
devices in graphic attribute control are OFF in the edit window.
Handy display*1 To switch the display of handy series.
Backlight color
Switch to display backlight color.
switch *2
State No. Display after switching the status number of Nstate lamp and Nstate parts.

witches and displays the display text string ID (0 to 7) for parts, etc.
Display text string ID
Window 1 Switches display/hide of window 1.
Window 2 Switches display/hide of window 2.
Window 3 Switches display/hide of window 3.
Global window Switches display/hide of the global window.
5-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
5-1 About Various Display Functions

Item Description
Displays the "Global window to display" window when the "Settings" button is clicked. Set the
Settings
global window to be displayed.
Exit View mode Closes the "View mode" window.

*1 This can be displayed only when VT model is setup to "VT3-V6H"/ "VT3-Q5H".

Item Description
Profile display disable To display the profile of VT3 handhold series.
Profile display enable Not to display the profile of VT3 handhold series.
Back display To display the back view of VT3 handhold series.
Handy display settings To setup the status of hardware switch and LED.

*2 VT model setting can only be displayed for "VT3-W4M/G*".

Handy display settings 5


To display/hide key switch and enable switch as well as operation lamp ON/OFF.

DISPLAY
Button switch options include Red, Yellow, Grey, and None.

Settings in the "Global window to display" window


Set the global window to be displayed cascading with other screens in the View mode in the "Global window to
display" window.
Mark the checkbox for the global window ID (0 to 7) to be displayed cascading, and set the global window No.

Reference If form screen is displayed in View mode when thermal printer is used, the screen is displayed in black
and white colors as in the same case of actual output.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-29


5-1 About Various Display Functions

MEMO

5
DISPLAY

5-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6
BEFORE YOU START
SETTING PARTS 6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


This chapter describes how to set up colors and line types in the graphic and
part windows as well as things you need to know when setting up other
components.

6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types •••••••••••••••••••• 6-2


6-2 About Touch Switches •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-7
6-3 Key Entry Parts ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-10
6-4 About Fonts ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-23
6-5 About Text Codes •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-24
6-6 About Devices •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-25
6-7 Setting of Devices•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-37
6-8 Indirect Reference ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-43
6-9 Calculation •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-49

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-1


6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types

Color Selection and BLK


Selection of graphic or text display color, and setting as to whether or not these are to made to blink are items that
must be set when setting graphics and parts.
The following describes color selection and BLK (blink).

Color selection

To set a color, click color selection buttons such as "Line color", "Plane color", "Frame color", "Background color", and
"Text color" ( ) in the part setting window.

Color palette
This is used when setting color models other than the VT3-Q5M/W4M(A)/W4G(A) as the target VT. You can choose

6 your desired colors from total 78 colors in the palette. In addition, you can also adjust colors with RGB (4096 colors).

Example of color palette


BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

16-level Palette
Used to set VT3-Q5M (32 levels) in the target VT.

Black-and-white palette
Used to set VT3-Q5M (black and white) in the target VT.

[Line Color][Frame Color][Character Color]

[Plane Color][Background Color] Advanced outline text

6-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types

Advanced settings
When the "Advanced" button is clicked, the color palette closes, and the "Line attribute settings" or "Plane attribute
settings" window is displayed.
In the advanced settings, you can make decorative settings such as patterns.
"Line Attribute Settings", page 6-5
"Plane Attribute Settings", page 6-6

BLK

The "Blink settings" window is displayed by clicking the "BLK" button ( ).


Select the blinking speed.

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Item Description
Standard
Fixed at 0.4 cycle (VT1 compatible)
(BLK)
Blink speed
Speed 1 (BL1)
Can be set within range 0.1 to 2.5 second in 0.1 increments. *1
Speed 2 (BL2)
*1 Changing the blink speed 1 and 2 settings
"VT System", page 12-12

Point For VT3-Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A), the "Blink


Settings" window is not displayed. The blinking speed becomes "Standard".
Color and Line
Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-3


6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types

Line Type Selection


VT STUDIO is provided with setting items for selecting the line type, to select which line types are to be used when
displaying graphics or parts.
Clicking the line type selection button ( ) in the part setting window, for example, displays a list of line
types.
Select the desired line type from the displayed list of line types.
Note that the line types that can be set vary according to the selected graphic or part.

Example of line type selection

Setting Item Line Width (Dot Space)


Light solid 1 dot wide
Heavy solid 2 dot wide

6 Light dotted
Heavy dot
1 dot wide
2 dot wide
Light dash 1 dot wide
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Heavy dash 2 dot wide


Light chain 1 dot wide
Heavy chain 2 dot wide
Light 2 dot 1 dot wide
Heavy 2 dot 2 dot wide
Heavy (4X) 4 dot wide
Heavy (8X) 8 dot wide
"Advanced..." -

Advanced settings
The "Line attribute settings" window is displayed by clicking the "Advanced" button.
In the advanced settings, you can make decorative settings such as patterns and graduations.
"Line Attribute Settings", page 6-5

6-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types

Line Attribute Settings


The "Line attribute settings" window is displayed by clicking the "Advanced" button when selecting a line color or
type.

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Color and Line
Type

Touch Switches

Item Description Key Entry Parts


Solid Line One-dot Chain
Fonts
Dash Line Two-dot Chain
Solid/Dotted line Dotted Line Text Codes
Light chain
Solid/Dotted Solid Device
Select from 1, 2, 4 and 8 dots.
line line
Line Setting of
width Other
Devices
than Select from 1 and 2 dots.
solid Indirect reference
Line color *1 Select the line color.
Calculation
Pattern type Select from 16 pattern types.
Line width Select from 1, 2, 4 and 8 dots.
Pattern
Line Color 1/Line
Select the line color.
Color 2*1
Line width Select from 1, 2, 4 and 8 dots.
Gradation *2 Line Color 1/Line
Select the line color.
Color 2 *1
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK*1
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Preview Displays a preview of the lines you have set.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*2 Can be set in the window where line types for the "Chart" tab of the Direction Chart and XY Chart are selected.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-5


6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types

Plane Attribute Settings


The "Plane attribute settings" window is displayed by clicking the "Advanced" button when selecting the color of a
graphic (plane color) or a part (background color).

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Item Description
Plane color Plane Color*1 Select the color of the plane.
Pattern type Select from 16 pattern types.
Pattern Plane Color 1/Plane
Select the color of the plane.
Color 2 *1
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK*1
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Preview Displays a preview of the plane or background you have set.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

6-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-2 About Touch Switches

About Touch Switches


Touch switches are placed if switches, lamp switches, and key entry parts (when "Select by switch" is set) are placed
in the edit window.
Multiple touch switches can be placed in a single screen, and simultaneous touching of up to two switches can be
recognized. Recognition of simultaneous touching of up to two switches can also be disabled in settings.
2-Touch Switch
"VT System", page 12-12

Point For VT3-X15/V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A), 2 touch switches cannot be pressed


simultaneously.

Reference Key entry parts comprise the following:


• Numeric value display • Alarm Display
• Text Display • Direction Chart
• Message Display • XY Chart
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"
6
• Please use safe touch switches. Otherwise, fatal danger and equipment damage may

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


happen. Also, design a system that is adaptable to touch switches malfunction.
• Do not touch the touch switches (touch panel) with a sharp-pointed object such as a pen or
screwdriver. Doing so might scratch the touch switch (touch panel) or cause them to
NOTICE
malfunction.
• Do not subject the touch panel (touch switches), cross-key pad or push-button switches on
the switch unit to shock or impact, or touch them with more than necessary force. Doing
so might damage them.

Point Only visible touch switches are valid as switches of base screens when window screens are
displayed.

@0000_1

Switch A is enabled as it is visible. Switch B, Color and Line


however, is disabled as it is hidden behind Type
A the window screen.
Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes
Base screen Window screen
Device

Setting of
Number of touch switches Devices

The following table shows the maximum number of touch switches that can be placed in a single screen. Indirect reference

Calculation
Model No. H x V = Max. Number of Touch Switches Number of Display Panel Dots
VT3-X15 64 x 48 = 3072 1024x768 dots
VT3-S12/S10 50 x 38 = 1900 800x600 dots
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R 40 x 30 = 1200 640x480 dots
VT3-V6H(G) 80 x 60 = 4800 640x480 dots
VT3-Q5H(G) 40 x 30 = 1200 320x240 dots
VT3-Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/
20 x 15 = 300 320x240 dots
Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) 40 x 16 = 640 320x128 dots

Point The above number of touch switches sometimes cannot be placed in a single screen due to screen
restrictions.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-7


6-2 About Touch Switches

 Size of touch switches


The grid size of touch switch varies with the models.

Mode The grid size of touch switch The configuration of touch switch

16 dots
16 dots
VT3-X15/
S12/S10/
V10/V8/V7/
16 dots 16 dots 16 dots 16 dots
Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/ 16 dots
Q5M(W)/
Q5T(W)A/
Q5M(W)A
Touch switches can be set to any size of integer Take the grid size (16 x 16 dots) in the above
multiples taking the above touch switch as the base diagram as reference to configurate components.
6 size.

2 dots
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

8 dots
VT3-
V6H(G)/
Q5H(G)/ 8 dots
8 dots
W4T(A)/
W4M(A)/ 2 dots
W4G(A) 8 dots
The size of a touch switch in the above figure is the Take the smaller grid
min. size, and size can be changed in vertical and size (2 x 2 dots) than that in the above diagram (8 x 8
horizontal direction in 2-point unit. dots) as reference to configurate components.

Point It is necessary to set switch area manually in "Switch zone change" when the grid size of
switch/indicator switch in VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/W4 series is set to 16 points or less.
"Changing the Switch Area", page 4-20

 When the number of display area dots is 800 x 600 dots

800 dots = 16 dots x 50 touch switches


16 x 16 dots

600 dots = 16 dots x 37 touch switches


+ 8 dots

Though half of the touch switch protrudes outside of the switch area on its lower side of the screen, the switch area is
valid. Therefore, for a model with a display area of 800 x 600 points, up to
50 (vertical) x 38 (horizontal)=1900
touch switches can be configured on one screen.
"Number of touch switches", page 6-7

6-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-2 About Touch Switches

Switch Area
The area where a touch switch is set on screen is called the "switch area".
To display a switch area, select "View(V)" -> "Switch area(A)" from the menu.
When a touch switch is placed overlapping another switch in a single screen (base, local window, global window) as
shown in the following figures, the switch in the foreground functions.

Switch 2 Switch 1

Switch 2

Switch 1

Switch 2 functions in this area.


Switch 1 functions in this area.
Switch 2 functions in this area.
Switch 1 functions in this area.
6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


The switch area is automatically adjusted to match the size of the object, and is also automatically enlarged or
reduced when objects are scaled. When objects are scaled, touch switches are also automatically scaled.
To manually set an automatically set switch area to a desired size, either select "Edit(E)" -> "Change switch area(A)"
in that order, or click the button .
"Switch Area", page 5-23
"Changing the Switch Area", page 4-20

Point If a switch area is changed when a prompt, alarm, or direction chart is displayed, "Use
Scrollbar Directly" and "Select a Prompt Line Directly" etc. cannot be used. Do not change
the switch area for these parts.

Color and Line


Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-9


6-3 Key Entry Parts
This section describes how to switch key operation modes when "Key entry" is specified in the basic part and meters/
graphs settings, and how to set key entries by PLC devices.

Key Entry Part Modes


When the "Key entry" setting of basic parts and meters/graphs is set to enabled, text or numerical values can be
entered on the keyboard or the numeric keypad, or displays can be scrolled using the scroll buttons. These parts are
called "key entry parts".

The following basic parts and meters/graphs can be set as key entry parts:
• Numeric value display • Alarm Display
• Text Display • Direction Chart
• Message Display • XY Chart

Key entry modes


6 Three modes are provided for key entry parts. (The following table shows an example for a numerical value display.)
Mode Screen Display Description
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Display mode 1234 Operations are not possible.

Active mode *2 Blinking


1234 Operations are possible.

Entry mode *1 777 Blink Operation in progress

*1 Prompt display, alarm display, direction chart, and XY chart don't have Entry Mode.
*2 With Numeric value display and Text Display, Active Mode can be switched to Display Mode and Entry Mode.

Point Only one key entry part can be set to the Active mode or Entry mode in one screen.
The frame blinks in the Active mode even if the frame color is set to transparent.
The background color becomes the preset color in the Entry mode even if the background
color is set to transparent.

Reference The frame in the Active mode and the cursor blinking speed in the Entry mode can be changed.
System blinking speed
"VT System", page 12-12

Switching modes
There are two ways of switching key entry parts from the Display mode to the Active mode: either by using VT3 touch
switches, or by storing numerical values for key entry order to devices on the currently connected PLC.

Reference "Key Entry Part Modes When the Screen is Displayed", page 6-11
"Switching the Key Entry Part Mode by PLC Devices", page 6-17

6-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Key Entry Part Modes When the Screen is Displayed


The "Key entry parts (initially active)" function can be set to the base and window (local and global) screens.

Reference With the VT1, the "Key entry parts (initially active)" function could be set only to base screens.

Base screen
(1) When the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox in the "Screen attribute settings" window is not marked, all
key entry parts are in the Display mode.
(2) When the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox in the "Screen attribute settings" window is marked, the key
entry parts having the smallest key entry order after the page is switched and displayed are in the Active mode.
(3) When the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox is marked for both the base and local windows, and "Initial
display" is set to the local window, the key entry parts having the smallest key entry order on the local window are
in the Active mode.
(4) When page switching occurs, the Active mode or Entry mode is canceled. 6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Color and Line

Reference • "Initial display" can be set only on the local window. Type

• "Screen attribute settings" window Touch Switches


"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18
Key Entry Parts

Window (local, global) screens Fonts

(1) When a window for which the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox is marked in the "Screen attribute Text Codes

settings" window is displayed, the key entry parts having the smallest key entry order on that window are in the Device
Active mode, and the Active mode for key entry parts on the base screen is canceled.
Setting of
(2) When multiple windows to which the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox is marked in the "Screen attribute Devices
settings" window are displayed simultaneously, the key entry parts having the smallest key entry order on the
Indirect reference
frontmost screen are in the Active mode.
(3) When a window for which the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox is not marked in the "Screen attribute Calculation

settings" window is displayed, the active state before the window is displayed is held.
(4) When the overlapping order of windows is swapped, active states will not change.
(5) Even if a window is moved, the Active mode or Entry mode setting of key entry parts on windows is held.
(6) Even if other windows are turned ON/OFF, the Active mode or Entry mode setting of key entry parts on windows is
held (excluding (1) above).
(7) When a window in which an Active mode or Entry mode key entry part is placed is turned OFF, the Active mode or
Entry mode is canceled.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-11


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Switching the Key Entry Part Mode by Touch Switches


Touching a VT3 touch switch switches the mode as follows to enable key entry.

Switching to the Active mode from the Display mode


Pressing the "Move entry destination" key entry switch
If a "Move entry destination(+1)" key entry switch is touched, the key entry part having the smallest key entry order is
set to the Active mode.
If a "Move entry destination(-1)" key entry switch is touched, the key entry part having the largest key entry order is
set to the Active mode.
Valid for Numeric value display, Text Display, Prompt Display, Alarm Display, Direction Chart, and XY Chart.

"Move entry destination (-1)" key entry switch


Touching "Move entry

6 "Move entry destination (+1)" key entry switch


destination (+1)" sets the key
entry order = 0 message display
to the Active mode.
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Key entry order = 0 Frame blinks


Machine A Machine A
(Display mode) (Active mode)
Machine B Machine B
Key entry order = 1 12345 (Display mode) 12345
CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER
(Display mode)
Text display END (Display mode) Text display END
Key entry order = 2
(Display mode)

Reference • Key entry switch


"8-2 Setting Switches"
• Key entry order
"Key Entry Order", page 6-15

Pressing key entry parts with "Select by switch" set to ON


If a key entry part for which the "Select by switch" checkbox is marked is touched, that key entry part is set to the
Active mode.
Valid for Numeric value display, Text Display, Prompt Display, Alarm Display, Direction Chart, and XY Chart.

"Select by switch" ON (Display mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)

777 777

CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER

END END

Touch "Select by switch" The Active mode is set.


ON key entry parts.

To switch to a key entry part in the Active mode when there are multiple key entry parts on the screen, use "Move
entry destination" key entry switches or selection of key entry parts by switches.

Reference "Key Entry Order", page 6-15


"Selecting Key Entry Parts by Switches", page 6-16

6-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Switching to the Entry mode from the Active mode


Touching a key entry switch such as a numeric keypad or keyboard switches the Active mode to the Entry mode.
This is enabled only for numerical value displays and text displays.

Frame blinks (Active mode) Cursor blinks (Entry mode)

777 7

CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER


END END

The Entry mode is set by


touching a key entry switch
on the numeric keypad.
6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Switching to the Active mode from the Entry mode (applying entries)
Touching an "Enter" key entry switch switches the Entry mode to the Active mode.
This is enabled only for numerical value displays and text displays.

Cursor blinks (Entry mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)

1234 1234

CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER


END END

Color and Line


Touching "Enter" sets the
Type
Active mode.
Touch Switches

Reference • To return to Display Mode, pressing “OK” to leave the frame empty. Key Entry Parts
Numeric value display Parts
Fonts
"Parts", page 12-21
• Do not change to the Display mode with the "Enter" key pressed. Text Codes

Text display parts Device


"Parts", page 12-21
Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-13


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Switching to the Active mode from the Entry mode, or to the Display mode from
the Active mode (canceling entry)
Touching the "Cancel" key entry switch cancels entry or operation, and switches the Entry mode to the Active mode,
or switches the Active mode to the Display mode.
Valid for Numeric value display, Text Display, Prompt Display, Alarm Display, Direction Chart, and XY Chart.
Message Display, Alarm Display, Direction Chart, and XY Chart don't have Entry Mode.

Frame blinks (Active mode) (Display mode)

1234 1234

CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER


END END

6 Touching "Cancel" sets the


Display mode.
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

The Active mode switches to the Display mode when a key entry part for which "Select by switch" set to ON is in the
Active mode and that key entry part is touched.

"Select by switch" ON (Active mode) Frame does not blink (Display mode)

Frame blinks 777 777

CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER

END END

Touch "Select by switch" The Display mode is set.


ON key entry parts.

Point When the following is set on alarm displays, message displays, and trend graph parts,
attention must be paid when changing the Active mode to the Display mode. For details, refer
to the settings for each respective part.
Alarm displays : Select message line directly, and operate scroll bar directly
"9-4 Setting Alarm Displays"
Message displays : Select message line directly, and operate scroll bar directly
"9-3 Setting Message Displays"
Trend graphs : Operate scroll bar directly
"10-3 Setting Trend images"

6-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Key Entry Order


If a "Move entry destination" key entry switch is touched when multiple key entry switches are placed on screen, key
entry parts are switched to the Active mode (key entry enabled state) in the key entry order.
Set the key entry order at "Key entry order" in the respective setting window.

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


"Move entry destination (-1)"
key entry switch
Key entry order = 0
Machine A "Move entry destination (+1)"
(Display mode) Machine B key entry switch
Key entry order = 1 12345 CANCEL ENTER

Frame blinks (Active mode) END

Text display Color and Line


Key entry order = 2 Type
(Display mode)
Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes
Touching "Move entry destination
(Display mode) (+1)" sets the key entry order = 2 text Device
Machine A
Machine B display to the Active mode. Setting of
Devices
(Display mode) 12345 CANCEL ENTER
END
Indirect reference
Frame blinks Text display
(Active mode) Calculation

Point • Valid for Numeric value display, Text Display, Message Display, Alarm Display, Direction
Chart, and XY Chart. If there are multiple objects having the same key entry order on
screen, the key entry order of these objects is not guaranteed. To correct the key entry
order, change by selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Change key entry order(K)".
"Change Key Entry Order", page 4-21
• The number of key entry parts that can be placed in a single page is restricted. If key entry
objects are placed on screens exceeding this limit, an error will occur when the data check
is performed. If an error occurs, reduce the number of key entry parts.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"
"12-9 Data Check"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-15


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Selecting Key Entry Parts by Switches


Select key entry parts by setting up the “Select by Switch” option. If multiple key entry parts are placed on screen,
key entry switches can be switched to the Active mode (key entry enabled state) by touching that key entry switch.

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Key entry order = 0


"select by switch" ON Machine A
(Display mode) Machine B
Key entry order = 1 12345 CANCEL ENTER
END
(Display mode) 6GZVFKURNC[
Key entry order = 2
Frame blinks (Active mode)

Frame blinks Touching "select by switch" ON


Machine A
(Active mode) message displays sets the Active mode.
Machine B
(Display mode) 12 345 CANCEL ENTER
END

(Display mode) 6GZVFKURNC[

In the above figure, the message display in the Display mode (entry disabled state) is immediately switched to the
Active mode regardless of the key entry order by touching it directly as the "Select by switch" checkbox is marked.
Text display in the Active mode is switched to the Display mode.

6-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Switching the Key Entry Part Mode by PLC Devices


Stores the key entry order (numerical value) to the device of the PLC currently connected to the VT3, and switches
the mode of the key entry parts.

Setting the key entry destination specification

1 Either select "Resources(R)" -> "VT system settings(S)" -> "Other(O)" from the menu, or select "Other" from
"VT system settings" on the "System Settings" tab on the workspace.

2 Mark the "Specify key entry destination" checkbox, and set the target word device.

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


The following explanation is for an example when the target word device of the key entry destination specification is
set to the PLC's data memory DM0000 (in the case of the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700, data memory DM00000, or
Color and Line
in the case of the A500, data register D000000).
Type

Touch Switches

Reference "Other", page 12-31 Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-17


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Content of target word device in the key entry destination specification


When the "Specify key entry destination" checkbox is marked, two words (fixed) are occupied starting from the target
word device.

Device No. Description Bit Remarks


0 to 7 Specify key entry order (0 to 255: decimal)
Specify window
0 :Base
1 :Window 1
2 :Window 2
3 :Window 3
4 :Interrupt Window
5 :Global window ID0
8 to 11
6 :Global window ID1
Specify 7 :Global window ID2
Leading No. +0
(write from PLC to VT) 8 :Global window ID3
9 :Global window ID4
10 :Global window ID5

6 12 to 14
11 :Global window ID6
12 :Global window ID7
Reserved (unusable)
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Key entry enabled/disabled *1


15 0: Enabled 1:Disabled (switch all the key input parts to
Display Mode with OFF -> ON)
Notify key entry order of key entry parts in Active or Entry
0 to 7
mode (0 to 255: decimal)
Notify window in which key entry parts in Active or Entry
mode exist
0 :Base
1 :Window 1
2 :Window 2
3 :Window 3
4 :Interrupt Window
Notify 8 to 11 5 :Global window ID0
Leading No. 1 6 :Global window ID1
(write from VT to PLC) *2
7 :Global window ID2
8 :Global window ID3
9 :Global window ID4
10 :Global window ID5
11 :Global window ID6
12 :Global window ID7
12 to 14 Reserved (unusable)
Notify presence of key entry parts in Active or Entry mode
15
0: Yes 1: No
*1 When this bit turns ON, all key entry parts are switched to the Display mode when the bit state changes from
OFF to ON. he states of the other bits 0 to 14 are ignored.
All key entry parts that have been switched to the Active mode by using touch switches on the VT3 or key entry parts
that are in the process of being entered in the Entry mode are switched to the Display mode.
*2 You can use either a specified (PLC -> VT reading) area to switch to a key entry part in Active Mode, or use a
VT3 touch switch to switch to the key entry order of a key entry part in Active Mode (Entry Mode) and the
Reading Notice (VT -> PLC reading) area.
You can learn which key entry parts are currently in the Active mode (Entry mode).
Bit 15 (MSB) turns ON when all key entry parts are in the Display mode, and all of the other bits 0 to 14 turn
OFF (0).

Reference Base, Window


"Screen Configuration", page 2-5

6-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Point • Reserved area can not be used.


• If key entry parts specified at the specified area (write from PLC to VT) cannot be set to the
Active mode in the following states, all key entry parts are switched to the Display mode,
and bit 15 (MSB) of the notified area (write from VT to PLC) is turned ON:
• There are no key entry parts specified at "Specify key entry order" (bits 0 to 7).
• The window specified at "Specify window" (bits 8 to 11) is not displayed.
• Changes to settings for the specified key entry part are not enabled.
• When the "Specify key entry destination" checkbox is marked, the setting of "Key entry
parts (initially active)" set at "Base settings" in the "Screen attribute settings" window is
ignored, and the state specified at the specified area (write from PLC to VT) is entered.
"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18
• Valid for Numeric value display, Text Display, Message Display, Alarm Display, Direction
Chart, and XY Chart. If there are multiple objects having the same key entry order on
screen, which key entry parts are switched to the Active mode is not guaranteed when they
are specified at the specified area (write from PLC to VT). To correct the key entry order,
change by selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Change key entry order(K)".
"Change Key Entry Order", page 4-21

6
Creating PLC ladder programs

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Manipulate the bits (0 to 7) of "Specify key entry order" and the bits (8 to 11) of "Specify window" in the device
specified (write from PLC to VT) in the PLC's ladder program.
Manipulate the key entry enable/disable bit (15) of key to switch key entry parts from the Active mode (Entry mode) to
the Display mode.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Key entry enable/disable Color and Line


Bit change from OFF to Type
Specify key entry order
ON changes all key entry
0 to 255 decimal numerical values Touch Switches
parts to the Display mode. Specify window
are stored.
0: Base Key Entry Parts

1: Window 1 Fonts
2: Window 2
Text Codes
3: Window 3
4: Interrupt window Device

5: Global window ID0 Setting of


6: Global window ID1 Devices

7: Global window ID2 Indirect reference


8: Global window ID3
Calculation
9: Global window ID4
10: Global window ID5
11: Global window ID6
12: Global window ID7

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-19


6-3 Key Entry Parts

[Example] To switch a key entry part having key entry order "100" currently placed on the base screen to the
Active mode (Decimal numerical value "100" is expressed as "64(H)" in Hexadecimal.)

Ladder program on KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700,


Visual KV-10 to 40, KZ-10 to 80,300,350
**** $0064 DM0000
㧨LDA㧪 㧨STA㧪

$ stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

Ladder program on A500


****
MOV H0064 D0‫ޓ‬

H stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

6 Ladder program on SYSMAC-C series made by OMRON


****
‫ޓ‬MOV‫ޓ‬
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

# 0064
DM0000

* * * * is the condition relay for switching to the Active mode.

[Example] To switch a key entry part having key entry order "10" currently placed on window 3 to the Active
mode (Decimal numerical value "10" is expressed as "A(H)" in Hexadecimal.)

Ladder program on KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700,


Visual KV-10 to 40, KZ-10 to 80,300,350
**** $030A DM0000
㧨LDA㧪 㧨STA㧪

$ stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

Ladder program on A500


****
MOV H030A D0‫ޓ‬

H stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

Ladder program on SYSMAC-C series made by OMRON


****
‫ޓ‬MOV‫ޓ‬
# 030A
DM0000

"* * * *" is the condition relay for switching to the Active mode.

6-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-3 Key Entry Parts

[Example] To switch all key entry parts to the Display mode

Ladder program on KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700,


Visual KV-10 to 40, KZ-10 to 80,300,350
**** $8000 DM0000
㧨LDA㧪 㧨STA㧪

$ stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

Ladder program on A500


****
MOV H8000 D0‫ޓ‬

H stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

Ladder program on SYSMAC-C series made by OMRON

6
****
‫ޓ‬MOV‫ޓ‬
#8000
DM0000

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


"* * * *" is the condition relay for switching to the Display mode.

Conflict in mode switching between switching by PLC devices and by touch


switches
When a touch switch is touched to switch a mode, the state of the key entry part, that has been switched by the touch
switch, is written to the specified (write from PLC to VT) device. After the specified state is switched to, the state is
written to the notified device (write from VT to PLC).

[Example] To switch to the Active mode by touching a key entry part to which "Select by switch" is set

No Active mode key entry parts Active mode Color and Line
Type

Touch Switches

Numerical display Key Entry Parts


777 777
Key entry order: 1 Fonts
CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER
"select by switch" ON
END END
Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices
Write
Indirect reference
Specify (PLCψVT) 8000(H) 0001(H) 0001(H)
Calculation
A
Write

Notify (VTψPLC) 8000(H) 8000(H) 0001(H)

A When the numerical value is written to the specified (write from PLC to VT) device from the PLC after
in the figure above, mode switching by PLC device is given priority, and the mode written on the PLC is
switched to immediately after the Active mode is switched to by selection by switches. For this reason,
mode switching by touch switches will no longer be possible if numerical values are continuously
written to the specified (write from PLC to VT) device when mode switching is performed on the PLC
device.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-21


6-3 Key Entry Parts

No Active mode key entry parts Active mode Reset to Display mode

777 777 777

CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER


END END END

Write Read
Specify 8000(H)
8000(H) 0001(H) 8000(H)
(PLC->VT)

6 Notify
Write Write

8000(H) 8000(H) 0001(H) 8000(H)


(VT->PLC)
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

8000 Hex is written (continued) on PLC.

To prevent mode switching by touch switches from being disabled when switching the mode by PLC devices, write
the numerical values to the specified (write from PLC to VT) device when the write conditions are satisfied.

[Example] To switch a key entry part having key entry order "10" currently placed on the base screen to the
Active mode (Decimal numerical value "10" is expressed as "A(H)" in Hexadecimal.)

Ladder program on KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700,


Visual KV-10 to 40, KZ-10 to 80,300,350
**** $000A DM0000
χLDA㧪 χSTA㧪

$ stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

Ladder program on A500


****
MOVP H000A D0‫ޓ‬

H stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

Ladder program on SYSMAC-C series made by OMRON


****
‫ޓ‬㧬MOV‫ޓ‬
# 000A
DM0000

"* * * *" is the condition relay for switching to the Active mode.

6-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-4 About Fonts

Fonts Available on the VT3


VT1 provides Outline Fonts and Bitmap Fonts.
In addition to the above two fonts, VT2 also provides Stroke Fonts.
In addition to the above three fonts, VT3 also provides Windows Fonts.

Outline fonts
• Can be used for outline texts and switch, lamp labels.
• Outline fonts can be displayed sharp-looking even if they are enlarged.
• Stroke fonts can be displayed sharp-looking even if they are enlarged.

Bitmap fonts
• Bitmap font can be used in bitmap text and key entry parts (numerical value displays, text displays, message

6
displays, alarm displays, and scales on meters/ graphs)
• Bitmap fonts can be set only in integer multiples of 16 dots.
• When bitmap fonts are enlarged, edges appear rougher or more jagged.

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


• Bitmap fonts can be displayed in many languages representing out 30,000 characters (UNICODE supported).

Stroke fonts
• Stroke fonts can be used in key entry parts (numerical value displays, text displays, message displays, alarm
displays).
• Stroke fonts can be set in 1-dot increments within the range 24 to 96 dots.
• Stroke fonts can be displayed sharp-looking even if they are enlarged.
• About 8,000 characters as defined in ASCII/Shift JIS Classes 1 and 2 can be displayed.

Windows Fonts
• Stroke fonts can be used in key entry parts (numerical value displays, text displays, message displays, alarm
displays). To display a text, its font should be registered. If an unregistered font is used, a bitmap font is displayed. Color and Line
• The display picture ID can be used in the title bar. Type

• Scales of meters and graphs can be used. Touch Switches


• Stroke fonts can be set in 1-dot increments within the range 8 to 512 dots.
Key Entry Parts
• Stroke fonts can be displayed sharp-looking even if they are enlarged.
Fonts
• Only equally-sized fonts can be used. (for example: use MS Gothic, and not MSP Gothic)
• Cannot use the vertical writing fonts (fonts with @). Text Codes

• Max 64 fonts are available. A font with a different name or font size will be treated as a different font. A font with a Device
different color and style will not be treated as a different font.
Setting of
Devices
Image Fonts
Indirect reference

• Can be used by numeric display parts. Calculation


• Can use digital images (bitmap and JPEG files) to display values.

Reference Stroke fonts are provided by the Chinese JIS Code Table (JIS First-level Code Table and JIS Second-
level Code Table)
Kanji JIS Code Tables can be browsed by selecting "Help" and "Text code table(SJIS)" from Menu.

Point • Compared with bitmap fonts, stroke fonts may appear different in places.
• Text is not displayed as a stroke font when making screens.
• Stroke fonts cannot be used by VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-23


6-5 About Text Codes

Text Codes Available on the VT3


VT3 can use the following 3 codes.
• ASCII code
• Shift JIS code
• UNICODE

Reference • Respective text code tables can be browsed by selecting from Menu in the following order:
"Help(H)" -> "Text code table(SJIS)"
"Help(H)" -> "Text code table(UNICODE)"
• VT1 can use ASCII and Shift JIS code.
• When VT3 is used within China, it is necessary to transfer corresponding GB2312 fonts to the VT3
unit.
"System Program", page 13-17

6 About UNICODE
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

UNICODE is a new character code made to unify the major character codes throughout the world into one.
Alphabet characters, symbols, Japanese, Chinese, Korean, and other languages can be used. Note that some text
codes are not available.
You can choose a supporting UNICODE in the steps "Help (H)" -> "Text Code Table (UNICODE)". Check these text
codes before use.

Reference With UNICODE, Kanji characters used in Japan, China, Taiwan, and Korea are unified. "Unified" here
means that the same code is assigned to Kanji characters whose shape is judged to be the same.
For this reason, the shape sometimes differs in Japanese fonts and with fonts from other countries.
For example, with the character "gu", the South-East corner in the enclosure at the top is inverted
horizontally in the character that is in current use in China.
To use UNICODE, please first display it on the screen for confirmation.

Point All UNICODE text is expressed in two bytes. (Even 1-byte UNICODE text is expressed using two
bytes.)

6-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-6 About Devices
A "device" is an element used by PLC internal relays or programs such as timers, counters or data memory. On the
VT3, this range of elements is extended to include numerical values, indirect references, calculation, and worksheet
cells. All these are called "devices". Devices are set to display basic parts such as switches/lamps and numerical
value displays, and meters and graphs.
This section describes the devices that are set on VT STUDIO.

Target (reference) Devices


This item describes target (reference) devices that are set on switches/lamps, basic parts, and meters/graphs.
When setting switches/lamps, basic parts and meters/graphs, set so that the display on the VT3 changes when the
state of the PLC device or VT3 internal device changes. These kinds of devices are called "target (reference)
devices". There are two types of target (reference) devices, target (reference) bit devices and target (reference) word
devices.

Types of target (reference) devices

Item Target Bit Device Target word device


6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


I/O relay
Data memory
Internal auxiliary relay
Data register
Hold relay
PLC device *1 Counter/timer setting values
Link relay
Counter/timer current values
Counter/timer contacts
Relay *2 etc.
Data memory *3 etc.
VT internal device VT internal bit device (MB) VT internal word device (MW)
Link Device VT link bit device (LNB) VT link word device (LNW)
Other Numerical value, indirect reference, calculation, worksheet cell
*1 The PLC device varies according to the manufacturer and model of PLC used.
*2 When relays (I/O relays, internal auxiliary relays, etc.) are used as target (reference) word devices, 16 relays
for each channel are handled collectively as a single word device.
*3 "About word device bit specification", page 6-26

Display of PLC Devices Color and Line


Type
Displayed contents of a PLC device in a part setup window vary depending on whether the MultiTalk function is used.
Touch Switches

Normal Key Entry Parts

Fonts
Series-connected with PLC V: TPLC1: N-connection (Ethernet, thermoregulator, etc.)
Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

<Device Type> <Device No.> <Station No.>


Indirect reference

When MultiTalk is used Calculation

Series-connected with PLC V: TPLC1: N-connection (Ethernet, thermoregulator, etc.)

<Device Type> <Device No.>_ <PLC_A/B> <Device Type> <Device No.>_ <Station No.>_ <PLC_A/B㧪

Reference The displays of an internal device and Link device don’t include <Station No.>and <PLC_A/B>.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-25


6-6 About Devices

Target (reference) device settings


Target (reference) devices are set in the setting window for switches/lamps, basic parts, and meters/graphs, or in the
"Device settings" window.

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

"6-7 Setting of Devices"

About word device bit specification


Word devices can sometimes be selected for the target (reference) bit device in the setting window for switches/
lamps and graphic attribute controls or in the "Device settings" window.
For example, the device No. is displayed as follows when DM is selected:
(1)DM0000000 : The PLC to be connected is the PLC corresponding to the word device bit specification.
(2)DM0000-00 : The PLC to be connected is the PLC not corresponding to the word device bit specification.

Uppermost bit Lowermost bit


DM0000000 15 0
‫ ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬Lower two digits 00 to 15 DM00000
DM0000-00

For example, when DM0000-01 is set to the lamp bit device of a lamp, the lamp lights (in the case of an A contact)
when the state of bit 1 of DM0000 becomes 1 (ON).

6-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-6 About Devices

Cautions when the device No. is specified in the format in (2) and word device bit specification is used
When DM0000-07 is turned ON by a touch switch

Serial communications

C1 001 003 005 007 009 IN


000 002 004 006 008
0ch
EYENCE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0 1 2 3 4 5
KV-16AR
5ch
500 501 502 504

PLC
24V-OUT-OV C3 C4 503 505 OUT

VT3 Series

PLC DM0000
The value of DM0000 is read from the PLC in word units.
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
VT3 DM0000

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
If DM0000-15 or

6
DM0000-14 turns ON 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

on the PLC during


this period.
The bit of DM0000-07

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


is turned ON by the
touch switch.
PLC DM0000

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

VT3 DM0000

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PLC DM0000

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 The value of DM0000 is written to the PLC


0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
in word units.

The device is overwritten, so


DM0000-15 and DM0000-14
are turned OFF. Color and Line
Type

In the case of a PLC on which device Nos. are displayed in the format in (2), the VT3 reads up to 16 bits of data Touch Switches
collectively in a single operation from the PLC, changes the bits specified in the word device, and writes the 16 bits
Key Entry Parts
collectively to the PLC as the data format is not supported in the word device bit specification. For this reason, even if
Fonts
there is a change in the value of the word device the previous state is sometimes returned to.Pay attention to this fact
when using the VT3. Text Codes

Device

Overview of VT Internal Devices and VT Link Devices Setting of


Devices

Two devices are provided for VT3 internal memory, VT internal devices and VT link devices. The following table Indirect reference

summarizes an outline of these devices.


Calculation

VT3 Internal Memory Description


VT internal special Used for displaying system memory area in VTcommand ASCII/Binary mode
VT internal device and Date/Time (year/month/day, time).
device A device that you can freely assign functions to This device is used for VT-
Internal Free Device
command ASCII/Binary mode or for temporarily storing data to.
Link Device Used for communication with external equipment (KL and bar code readers). .

Reference • VT link devices have been newly added from VT2. In VT3, functions of devices are extended to bar
code readers.
• VT3-KL communications using VT link devices
VT3 Series Hardware Manual "Chapter 7 KL Link"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-27


6-6 About Devices

Structure of VT Internal Devices and VT Link Devices


VT internal devices and VT link devices are each appended with a device name as follows when used as bit devices
or as word devices.

Item When Used as a Bit Device When used as a word device


VT internal device MB MW
Link Device LNB LNW

VT internal bit devices and VT internal word devices share common memory. Likewise, VT link bit devices and VT
link word devices also share common memory.
With VT internal devices and VT link devices, a 5-digit device No. is set to bit devices, and a 4-digit device No. is set
to word devices.

The following shows the relationship between bit devices and word devices in VT internal devices and VT link
6 devices.

[Example] Relationship between MW001C and MB001C0 to MB001CF


BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Uppermost bit Lowermost bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MW001C

MBO01C0
MBO01C1
MBO01C2
MBO01C3
MBO01C4
MBO01C5
MBO01C6
MBO01C7
MBO01C8
MBO01C9
MBO01CA
MBO01CB
MBO01CC
MBO01CD
MBO01CE
MBO01CF

6-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-6 About Devices

VT Internal Device

List of VT internal devices


Item Device No. Description
General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas (MT
MW0000 to MW000F
compatible mode)
MW0010 Date/Time "year"
MW0011 Date/Time "month"
MW0012 Date/Time "day"
MW0013 Date/Time "day of week (number)"
MW0014 to MW0015 Date/Time "day of week (Kanji character)" Shift JIS code
MW0016 to MW0017 Date/Time "day of week (English character)" ASCII code
MW0018 Date/Time "hours"
MW0019 Date/Time "minutes"
MW001A Date/Time "seconds"
MW001B
MW001C
Displayed page No.
Display status
6
MW001D Display error state

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


MW001E Display control
MW001F Reserved
MW0020 to MW0023 VT timer (timer ID0 to 3) current count value
MW0024 to MW0031 Reserved
MW0032 Number of send packets
MW0033 Reserved
MW0034 Number of receive packets
VT internal special MW0035 Reserved
MW0000 to
device MW0036 Number of DATA BUILDER connection ports
MW00FF
(256 words) MW0037 Number of FTP connection ports
MW0038 to MW003E Reserved
MW003F VT No.
General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas
MW0040 to MW005F
(VT compatible mode) Color and Line
MW0060 to MW006F Reserved Type

MW0070 to MW007B Numerical value display saved data (UNICODE) Touch Switches
MW007C to MW007D The lower limit of value display *5
Key Entry Parts
MW007E to MW007F The upper limit of value display *5
MW0080 to MW00BF Text display saved data (UNICODE) Fonts

MW00C0 to MW00C1 VT2 Multi-link (master only)


Text Codes
MW00C2 to MW00CF Reserved
MW00D0 PLC _A station No. (0 to 15) connection status Device

MW00D1 PLC _A station No. (0 to 15) connection setup Setting of


MW00D2 PLC _A station No. (16 to 31) connection status Devices

MW00D3 PLC _A station No. (16 to 31) connection setup Indirect reference
MW00D4 to MW00D7 Reserved
Calculation
MW00D8 PLC _B station No. (0 to 15) connection status
MW00D9 PLC _B station No. (0 to 15) connection setup
MW00DA PLC _B station No. (16 to 31) connection status
MW00DB PLC _B station No. (16 to 31) connection setup
MW00DC to MW00FF Reserved
Internal Free Device
MW0100 to MW0FFF Free
(3840 words)

Point • VT internal devices cannot be manipulated (read/written) directly from a PLC. Internal
devices, however, can be read-out/read-in in the device transmission and PLC data folders.
"12-6 Device Transfer"
"Chapter 15 PLC DATA FOLDER"
• All VT internal devices are cleared (reset to zero) when the VT3 is turned OFF or screen data is sent to the
VT3.
"13-3 PC->VT Send Data"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-29


6-6 About Devices

Reference On the VT1, "VT internal free device 512 words + VT internal special device 256 words" were
available.
On the VT3, however, "VT internal free device 3840 words + VT internal special device 256 words"
are available.

VT internal special devices (word devices)

R/W
Device No. Description Data Format Range
Attribute
General serial /Ethernet-specific system
MW0000 to MW000F - - -
storage areas (MT compatible mode)*1
MW0010 Date/Time "year" Unsigned decimal Lower two digits: 0 to 99 R/W
MW0011 Date/Time "month" Unsigned decimal 1 to 12 R/W
MW0012 Date/Time "day" Unsigned decimal 1 to 31 R/W
MW0013 Date/Time "day of week (number)" Unsigned decimal 0 to 6 R/W
MW0014 to MW0015 Date/Time "day of week (Kanji character)" Shift JIS code Sun to Sat R

6
MW0016 to MW0017 Date/Time "day of week (English character)" ASCII code Sun to Sat R
MW0018 Date/Time "hours" Unsigned decimal 0 to 23 R/W
MW0019 Date/Time "minutes" Unsigned decimal 0 to 59 R/W
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

MW001A Date/Time "seconds" Unsigned decimal 0 to 59 R/W


MW001B Displayed page No. Unsigned decimal 0 to 8999 R
MW001C Display state (MB001C0 to MB001CF) *2 Bit Devices - R
MW001D Display error state (MB001D0 to MB001DF)*2 Bit Devices - R
MW001E Display control (MB001E0 to MB001EF) *2 Bit Devices - R
MW001F Reserved - - R
MW0020 to MW0023 VT timer (timer ID0 to 3) current count value*3 Unsigned decimal 0 to 65535 R
MW0024 to MW0031 Reserved - - -
MW0032 Number of send packets Unsigned decimal - R
MW0033 Reserved - - -
MW0034 Number of receive packets Unsigned decimal - R
MW0035 Reserved - - -
Number of DATA BUILDER connection
MW0036 Unsigned decimal - R
ports
MW0037 Number of FTP connection ports Unsigned decimal - R
MW0038 to MW003E Reserved - - -
MW003F VT No. Unsigned decimal 0 to 15 R
General serial/Ethernet-specific system
MW0040 to MW005F - - -
storage areas (VT compatible mode) *1
MW0060 to MW006F Reserved - - -
MW0070 to MW007B Numerical value display save data *4 UNICODE - R
MW007C to MW007D The lower limit of value display *5 - - -
MW007E to MW007F The upper limit of value display *5
MW0080 to WM00BF Text display save data *4 UNICODE - R
MW00C0 to MW00C1 VT2 Multi-link (master only) *2 Bit Devices - R
MW00C2 to MW00CF Reserved - - -
PLC _A Station No. (0 to 15) connection
MW00D0*2 Bit Devices - R
status
PLC _A Station No. (0 to 15) connection
MW00D1*2 Bit Devices - R/W
setup
PLC _A Station No. (16 to 31) connection
MW00D2*2 Bit Devices - R
status
PLC _A Station No. (16 to 31) connection
MW00D3*2 Bit Devices - R/W
setup
MW00D4 to MW00D7 Reserved - - -
PLC _B Station No. (0 to 15) connection
MW00D8*2 Bit Devices - R
status
PLC _B Station No. (0 to 15) connection
MW00D9*2 Bit Devices - R/W
setup
PLC _B Station No. (16 to 31) connection
MW00DA*2 Bit Devices - R
status
PLC _B Station No. (16 to 31) connection
MW00DB*2 Bit Devices - R/W
setup
MW00DC to MW00FF Reserved - - -
6-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
6-6 About Devices

*1 General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas (MT compatible mode): in VT1, the system storage
area for general serial communications.
General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas (VT mode) : the newly added mode in VT2.
To use VT-command ASCII/Binary mode, select either of these modes in "System memory area" in the VT system
settings, and set the system memory area.
General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas (VT mode): the initial number is always MW0040.
Details about the General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas
Chapter 23 General Serial/Ethernet Communication, VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connections
Manual.

Point • When using the general serial/Ethernet communications, do not use internal special
devices other than the general serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas,
internal timer, numerical value display memory, and text display memory.
• Reserved zone cannot be used.

Reference "Chapter 14 SYSTEM MEMORY AREA"

*2 For details, read the following. In addition, you can also refer to additional PLC connection setups • connection
6
status in the VT main unit system.

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


"12-4 VT System Parameters"
*3 The current value of the timer set at "VT timer" in the VT system settings is stored here.
*4 The value of active state numerical value displays and text displays are stored to memory when a switch (key
entry "copy") is touched.
*5 Save the upper/lower limit of the input range of the value display component in memory active status. In
inactive status, the value display component will be saved as 0.

About R/W attributes


VT internal word devices whose attribute is set to "R/W" can both read and write from and to numerical value displays
or text displays.
VT internal word devices whose attribute is set to "R" are capable of reading only.

Color and Line


Display state (MW001C) Read only Type

Touch Switches
Device No. Description 1 (ON) 0(OFF)
Key Entry Parts
MB001C0 Printing Printer unusable Printer usable
MB001C1 Reserved - - Fonts

MB001C2 Backlight OFF state Backlight OFF Backlight ON Text Codes


MB001C3 Video play/pause screen Pause screen Video image
Device
Memory Card is being
MB001C4 Memory Card is being accessed. Memory Card is not being accessed.
accessed. Setting of
MB001C5 Page switching setting state Switch on PLC Switch by touch switch Devices

MB001C6 Page switching mode Bit page switching Switch by page switching (leading No. +8)
Indirect reference
Memory Card is inserted in Memory Either the Memory Card is not inserted
MB001C7 Memory Card usable state Card slot, and Memory Card slot cover in the Memory Card slot, or the Calculation
is closed. Memory Card slot cover is open.
MB001C8 Window 1 display state Window 1 display Window 1 hide
MB001C9 Window 2 display state Window 2 display Window 2 hide
MB001CA Window 3 display state Window 3 display Window 3 hide
MB001CB Window 1 display specified state Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
MB001CC Window 2 display specified state Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
MB001CD Window 3 display specified state Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
MB001CE Reserved - -
MB001CF Interrupt window display state Display interrupt window Hide interrupt window

Point Reserved zone cannot be used.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-31


6-6 About Devices

Display error state (MW001D) Read only

Device No. Description 1(ON) 0(OFF)


MB001D0 System memory error VT3 internal system memory error No abnormality
MB001D1 Reserved - -
MB001D2 Memory Card access error Memory Card access error occurred No abnormality
MB001D3 to
Reserved - -
MB001D7
One of following communications
MB001D8 Communications error No abnormality
errors occurring:
MB001D9 Overrun error Overrun error No abnormality
MB001DA Framing error Framing error No abnormality
MB001DB Parity error Parity Error No abnormality
PLC communications state
MB001DC Communications error on PLC No abnormality
error
MB001DD Time-out error Time-out error No abnormality
MB001DE Checksum error Checksum error No abnormality

6 MB001DF Reserved - -

Point Reserved zone cannot be used.


BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Display control (MW001E) Read only

Device No. Description 1(ON) 0(OFF)


MB001E0 Execute printing Printing is executed by bit state changing to ON from OFF.
MB001E1 Reserved - -
MB001E2 Backlight OFF Backlight OFF Backlight ON
Clock Adjustment
(year/month/day/day of week) changed by bit state changing to ON from
MB001E3 (year/moth/dat • weekdays)
OFF
adjustment
Clock Adjustment
MB001E4 (hours/minutes) changed by bit state changing to ON from OFF
(hour/minute) adjustment
MB001E5 Page switching setting Switch on PLC Switch by touch switch
Switch by page switching (leading
MB001E6 Page switching mode Bit page switching
No. +8)
MB001E7 Clear communications error Communications error bit cleared by bit state changing to ON from OFF
MB001E8 Window 1 display ON Window 1 display ON Window 1 display OFF
MB001E9 Window 2 display ON Window 2 display ON Window 2 display OFF
MB001EA Window 3 display ON Window 3 display ON Window 3 display OFF
MB001EB Window 1 display setting Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
MB001EC Window 2 display setting Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
MB001ED Window 3 display setting Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
MB001EE Reserved - -
Execution of interrupt
MB001EF Display interrupt window Hide interrupt window
window display

VT2 Multi-link Connection state: master only (MW00C0) Read only

Device No. Description 1(ON) 0(OFF)


MB00C00 VT No. 0 connection state Always ON -
MB00C01 VT No. 1 connection state Connected to master Not connected to master
MB00C02 VT No. 2 connection state Connected to master Not connected to master
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
MB00C0E VT No. 14 connection state Connected to master Not connected to master
MB00C0F VT No. 15 connection state Connected to master Not connected to master
Chapter 20 VT2 MultiLink, VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connections Manual.

6-32 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-6 About Devices

VT2 MultiLink Communication errors: only for the master (MW00C1) Read only.

Device No. Description 1(ON) 0(OFF)


MB00C10 VT No.0 communications error - OFF at all times
MB00C11 VT No.1 communications error Communications error with master No abnormality
MB00C12 VT No. 2 communications error Communications error with master No abnormality
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
MB00C1E VT No. 14 communications error Communications error with master No abnormality
MB00C1F VT No. 15 communications error Communications error with master No abnormality
Chapter 20 VT2 MultiLink, VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connections Manual.

PLC_A Station No. (0 to 15) Connection Status (MW00D0) Read Only

Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)

MB00D00
PLC_A Station No. 0 PLC
connection status
Station No. 0 PLC is linked with
VT3
Station No. 0 PLC is not linked
with VT3 6
PLC_A Station No. 1 PLC Station No. 1 PLC is linked with Station No. 1 PLC is not linked
MB00D01

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 2 PLC Station No. 2 PLC is linked with Station No. 2 PLC is not linked
MB00D02
connection status VT3 with VT3
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
PLC_A Station No. 14 PLC Station No. 14 PLC is linked with Station No. 14 PLC is not linked
MB00D0E
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 15 PLC Station No. 15 PLC is linked with Station No. 15 PLC is not linked
MB00D0F
connection status VT3 with VT3

PLC_A Station No. (0 to 15) Connection Setup (MW00D1) Read/Write

Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


PLC_A Station No. 0 PLC Connect Station No. 0 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 0 PLC with Color and Line
MB00D10
connection setup VT3 VT3 Type
PLC_A Station No. 1 PLC Connect Station No. 1 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 1 PLC with
MB00D11 Touch Switches
connection setup VT3 VT3
PLC_A Station No. 2 PLC Connect Station No. 2 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 2 PLC with Key Entry Parts
MB00D12
connection setup VT3 VT3
Fonts
• • • •
• • • •
Text Codes
• • • •
PLC_A Station No. 14 PLC Connect Station No. 14 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 14 PLC Device
MB00D1E
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 15 PLC Connect Station No. 15 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 15 PLC Setting of
MB00D1F Devices
connection setup VT3 with VT3
Indirect reference

PLC_A Station No. (16 to 31) Connection Status (MW00D2) Read Only Calculation

Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


PLC_A Station No. 16 PLC Station No. 16 PLC is linked with Station No. 16 PLC is not linked
MB00D20
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 17 PLC Station No. 17 PLC is linked with Station No. 17 PLC is not linked
MB00D21
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 18 PLC Station No. 18 PLC is linked with Station No. 18 PLC is not linked
MB00D22
connection status VT3 with VT3
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
PLC_A Station No. 30 PLC Station No. 30 PLC is linked with Station No. 30 PLC is not linked
MB00D2E
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 31 PLC Station No. 31 PLC is linked with Station No. 31 PLC is not linked
MB00D2F
connection status VT3 with VT3

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-33


6-6 About Devices

PLC_A Station No. (16 to 31) Connection Setup (MW00D3) Read/Write

Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


PLC_A Station No. 16 PLC Connect Station No. 16 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 16 PLC
MB00D30
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 17 PLC Connect Station No. 17 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 17 PLC
MB00D31
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 18 PLC Connect Station No. 18 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 18 PLC
MB00D32
connection setup VT3 with VT3
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
PLC_A Station No. 30 PLC Connect Station No. 30 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 30 PLC
MB00D3E
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 31 PLC Connect Station No. 31 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 31 PLC
MB00D3F
connection setup VT3 with VT3

6 PLC_B Station No. (0 to 15) Connection Status (MW00D8) Read Only

Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

PLC_B Station No. 0 PLC Station No. 0 PLC is linked with Station No. 0 PLC is not linked
MB00D80
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 1 PLC Station No. 1 PLC is linked with Station No. 1 PLC is not linked
MB00D81
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 2 PLC Station No. 2 PLC is linked with Station No. 2 PLC is not linked
MB00D82
connection status VT3 with VT3
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
PLC_B Station No. 14 PLC Station No. 14 PLC is linked with Station No. 14 PLC is not linked
MB00D8E
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 15 PLC Station No. 15 PLC is linked with Station No. 15 PLC is not linked
MB00D8F
connection status VT3 with VT3

PLC_B Station No. (0 to 15) Connection Setup (MW00D9) Read/Write

Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


PLC_B Station No. 0 PLC Connect Station No. 0 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 0 PLC with
MB00D90
connection setup VT3 VT3
PLC_B Station No. 1 PLC Connect Station No. 1 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 1 PLC with
MB00D91
connection setup VT3 VT3
PLC_B Station No. 2 PLC Connect Station No. 2 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 2 PLC with
MB00D92
connection setup VT3 VT3
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
PLC_B Station No. 14 PLC Connect Station No. 14 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 14 PLC
MB00D9E
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 15 PLC Connect Station No. 15 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 15 PLC
MB00D9F
connection setup VT3 with VT3

6-34 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-6 About Devices

PLC_B Station No. (16 to 31) Connection Status (MW00DA) Read Only

Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


PLC_B Station No. 16 PLC Station No. 16 PLC is linked with Station No. 16 PLC is not linked
MB00DA0
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 17 PLC Station No. 17 PLC is linked with Station No. 17 PLC is not linked
MB00DA1
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 18 PLC Station No. 18 PLC is linked with Station No. 18 PLC is not linked
MB00DA2
connection status VT3 with VT3
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
PLC_B Station No. 30 PLC Station No. 30 PLC is linked with Station No. 30 PLC is not linked
MB00DAE
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 31 PLC Station No. 31 PLC is linked with Station No. 31 PLC is not linked
MB00DAF
connection status VT3 with VT3

PLC_B Station No. (16 to 31) Connection Setup (MW00DB) Read/Write 6


Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


PLC_B Station No. 16 PLC Connect Station No. 16 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 16 PLC
MB00DB0
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 17 PLC Connect Station No. 17 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 17 PLC
MB00DB1
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 18 PLC Connect Station No. 18 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 18 PLC
MB00DB2
connection setup VT3 with VT3
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
PLC_B Station No. 30 PLC Connect Station No. 30 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 30 PLC
MB00DBE
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 31 PLC Connect Station No. 31 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 31 PLC
MB00DBF
connection setup VT3 with VT3

Color and Line


Type
Internal Free Device
Touch Switches
For the VT internal devices, the devices whose functions can be freely determined are called "VT internal free
Key Entry Parts
devices". VT internal free devices can be used for temporarily storing data.
Fonts

There are two types of VT internal free devices, VT internal bit devices and VT internal word devices. Text Codes

The internal bit devices are the devices that are assigned to MB. The internal word devices are the devices that are Device
assigned to MW.
Setting of
Devices
VT internal bit devices and VT internal word devices share common memory.
Indirect reference
A 5-digit device No. is set to VT internal bit devices, and a 4-digit device No. is set to VT internal word devices.
Calculation

VT internal free device area


Item VT internal free device area
Used as VT internal bit device MB01000 to MB0FFFF
Used as VT internal word device MW0100 to MW0FFF

Reference • "Link Device", page 6-36


• Holding of internal free device values even if the VT3 is turned OFF
"VT System", page 12-12

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-35


6-6 About Devices

Link Device
VT link devices are for communicating with external equipment. 4352 words LNW0000 to LNW10FF are provided for
VT link devices.

List of link devices

Device No. Description R/W Attribute


Communications R or R/W
LNW0000 to LNW007F data monitor area (Depending on KL
(128 words) setups)
Connection
LNW0080 to LNW008F R
information
0(LNB00900) Broken line error (for KLLink) R
1(LNB00901) Send lamp R

6 LNW0090 2(LNB00902)
3 to F
Receive lamp R

(LNB00903 to Reserved -
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

LNB0090F)
LNW0000 to
LNW10FF LNW0091 to LNW00BF Reserved Reserved -
Bar code data
LNW00C0 reading length R
(byte)
Bar code reading
0(LNB00C10) R/W
end notice bit
LNW00C1 1 to F For bar codes
(LNB00C11 to Reserved -
LNB00C1F)
Bar code data
LNW00C2 to LNW10C1 storage area R
(4096 characters)
LNW10C2 to LNW10FF Reserved Reserved -

Reference • In VT3, link devices are extended to LNW10FF. (in VT2, they are extended to LNW00FF)
• VT3-KL communications using VT link devices
VT3 Series Hardware Manual "Chapter 7 KL Link"

Point • VT link devices cannot be manipulated (read/written) directly from a PLC. Internal devices,
however, can be read-out/read-in in the device transmission and PLC data folders.
"12-6 Device Transfer"
"Chapter 15 PLC DATA FOLDER"
• When the VT3 power is turned off or screen data is transmitted to VT3, link devices are
cleared out (0).
"13-3 PC->VT Send Data"
• Reserved zone cannot be used.

About R and R/W attributes


The following operations are possible on VT link devices having the "R" or "R/W" attribute:
R : Read
R/W : Read/Write

Use VT link devices having the "R" attribute only for reading.

6-36 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-7 Setting of Devices
Normally, the PLC devices (data storages, input/output relays, auxiliary relays, timers, counters, etc.) to be connected
should be set up from the device setup line in the setup window of a part (switches, lamps, basic components,
meters, and graphs, etc.).
This has been extended so that numerous data can be set to the device setting field.

Items Selectable in the Device Setting Field


Example of part setting window (numerical value display)

PLC devices

6
Indirect reference

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Calculation

Worksheet cell

Numerical constant

PLC devices
Color and Line
Type

Touch Switches

Indirect reference Key Entry Parts


Calculation
Fonts
Worksheet cell
Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-37


6-7 Setting of Devices

A typical MultiTalk setup window (numerical display)

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Item Description
Num: Numerical constant Select this item to set constants.
Select this item to set devices (data memory, I/O relay, auxiliary relay, timer, counter,
PLC: PLC device
etc.) for the PLC to connect and VT3 internal device/link devices.
Indirect: Indirect reference Select this item to set indirect references.
Calc: Calcuration Select this item to set calculations.
Cell: Worksheet cell Select this item to set worksheet cells.
For details on each item, refer to the explanations on the following pages.

Point The items ("Numerical constant/PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell") that can be


selected in device settings vary according to the part. For details, refer to the settings for the
respective part.

Setting Methods

1 Select the desired items to set from the device setting field.
The items selected in the device setting field are displayed.

[Example] Numerical value display

Normal When MultiTalk is used

6-38 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-7 Setting of Devices

2 When "Num: Numerical constant" is selected, enter the numerical value (constant).
When "PLC device", "Ind: Indirect reference", "Calc: Calculation", or "Cell: Worksheet cell" is selected, click the
"Browse" button or calculation formula to the side of the device setting field.
The "Device settings" window is displayed.

Normal When MultiTalk is used

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


"Device settings" window

This item describes the "Device settings" window.

PLC device
This item describes an instance where the data type is PLC device.

Example of word device


Normal When MultiTalk is used

Color and Line


Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-39


6-7 Setting of Devices

Example of bit device


Normal When MultiTalk is used

6 Data type
Item
Displays "PLC device".
Description

PLC When MultiTalk is used, select PLC “A/B”.


BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

PLC No. Set Station No. for Ethernet and thermoregulator (1:N) connection.
PLC device Sets the type of target PLC device and device No..
Data length Select the data length from "1 word/2 words".
Data Format Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/BCD/Hex/Float".
Mode Select the mode from "A contact/B contact".
Number of data Set the number of devices as an ascending number from 1 to be used.
Device explanation Displays an explanation, for example, of the input range of devices to be set.
Internal device help For internal devices of VT, see the PDF file.

Point When MlultiTalk is used, internal devices and link devices are only displayed in PLC A.

The items that are displayed vary according to the parts that are set.

[Example] Text display


Normal When MultiTalk is used

Item Description
PLC When MultiTalk is used, select PLC "A/B".
PLC No. Set Station No. for Ethernet and thermoregulator (1:N) connection.
PLC device Set the target word device.
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, the text string is handled as a UNICODE text string.
When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper byte and lower byte of the text string
Swap upper/lower bytes
to be stored is swapped.

6-40 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-7 Setting of Devices

Indirect reference
This item describes an instance where the data type is indirect reference.
Normal When MultiTalk is used

An "Indirect reference" is a method of adding the content (value) of an index device to the device No. of a base
device to specify the device No. targeted for processing.
6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Details of indirect references
"6-8 Indirect Reference"

Calculation
This item describes an instance where the data type is calculation.
Normal When MultiTalk is used

Color and Line


Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes
Set the calculation formula using variables and operators. The result of the calculation formula is reflected in the
Device
preset part.
Fro details of calculation, see Setting of
Devices
"6-9 Calculation"
Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-41


6-7 Setting of Devices

Cell (worksheet cell)


This item describes an instance where the data type is cell.

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

The value of the worksheet cell is reflected in the part.


For details of worksheets, see
"Chapter 16 WORKSHEET"

6-42 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-8 Indirect Reference

About Indirect References


An "indirect reference" is a method of adding the content (value) of an index device to the device No. of a base device
to specify the device No. targeted for processing.

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


For example, when the base device is DM1000 and the value of the index device (DM0000) is 50, the value of
DM1050 is referenced as follows:

DM1000 + <DM0000> → DM1050


1000 + 50 = 1050

The value of the reference DM1050.


For how to open the "Device settings" window (indirect reference), see
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

Color and Line


Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-43


6-8 Indirect Reference

Setting indirect references


This section describes how to set indirect references.
The setting items of base devices varies according to the part to be set. The following describes common setting
items. For details on other setting items, refer to the page related to settings for the respective part.

Example of "Device settings" window (indirect reference)

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Item Description
Data type Displays "Indirect reference".
PLC When MultiTalk is used, select PLC "A/B".
Station No. Set Station No. for Ethernet and thermoregulator (1 : N) connection.
Base device Base device Sets the type of target PLC device and device No..
Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data Format
BCD/Hex/Float".
PLC When MultiTalk is used, select PLC "A/B".
Station No. Set Station No. for Ethernet and thermoregulator (1 : N) connection.
Index device
Index device Sets the type of target PLC device and device No..
Data Format Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Displays an explanation, for example, of the input range of devices
Device explanation
to be set.

6-44 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-8 Indirect Reference

Action of Indirect Reference Index


Base devices and the reference device that are based on data length and index devices are as follows.
(same as VT2’s action)

Base device
Value of index device Reference device
Device Number of words
1 0 DM00000
1 1 DM00001
1 2 DM00002
DM00000
2 0 DM00001/DM00000
2 1 DM00003/DM00002
2 2 DM00005/DM00004

As we can see from the above table, the address is offset based on the number of the base device.

To offset the address only based on the value of the index device and not based on the number of words of the base
device, select "Resource(R)" -> "VT Main Unit Setup (S)" -> "Parts (B)" from the menu.
6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


An indirect reference index performs detection regardless of the data length.

Color and Line


Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices
Base device
Value of index device Reference device Indirect reference
Device Number of words
1 0 DM00000 Calculation

1 1 DM00001
1 2 DM00002
DM00000
2 0 DM00001/DM00000
2 1 DM00002/DM00001
2 2 DM00003/DM00002

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-45


6-8 Indirect Reference

Indirect Reference Setting Examples


The following shows an example of how to set an indirect reference.

Example on a numerical value display

The values of 100 data memories from DM00000 to DM00099 are displayed sequentially five memories at a time on
five numerical value displays.

Display example

Device No. DM Value

6
DM00000 10000
DM00001 10002
DM00002 10004
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

DM00003 10006
DM00004 10008
DM00005 10010
10000 DM00006 10012
10002
DM00095 10190
10004
DM00096 10192
10006
DM00097 10194
10008 DM00098 10196
DM00099 10198

10000 to 10008 :Numerical value display (called numerical value displays (1) to (5) in order from the top)
:Switch (word set: data addition)
:Switch (word set: data subtraction)

DM00000 10000 DM00005 10010 DM00095 10190


DM00001 10002 DM00006 10012 DM00096 10192
DM00002 10004 DM00007 10014 DM00097 10194
DM00003 10006 DM00008 10016 DM00098 10196
DM00004 10008 DM00009 10018 DM00099 10198

Touching the / switch increments/decrements the device No. five Nos. at a time and displays the numerical value.

In the above example, the values of the index device are added/subtracted five values at a time each time a word set
function switch is touched to change the device (reference word device in the numerical value display) that is
referenced.

6-46 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-8 Indirect Reference

Numerical value display/switch setting example


Numerical value display (1)

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Item Base device Index device
Numerical value display (1) DM00000
Numerical value display (2) DM00001
Numerical value display (3) DM00002 DM01000
Numerical value display (4) DM00003
Numerical value display (5) DM00004

Switch (word set): 


Sets the target word device of the switch (word set) to the same as the index device.

Color and Line


Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-47


6-8 Indirect Reference

Cautions for Indirect References


Function of indirect references when the value of an index device changes

1234 Serial communications

Base device : DM0


Index device : DM100

6 Value of index device


DM100
Numerical value displayRead
DM5
Read
5 1234 1234
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

DM5

10 DM5

1234
DM10
DM10
Read 5678
DM10 5678

• When using indirect references, do not set the value of an index device that will exceeds the allowable device
range (device range stored internally on the PLC).
• If indirect referencing fails, the previously referenced value is displayed, and the message "Reference Device
Address Error" is displayed in the error display at the bottom left of the screen.
• If indirect referencing fails for the first time, the value of the base device is displayed, and the message "Reference
Device Address Error" is displayed at the bottom left of the screen.
• If the value of an index device for a part to which an indirect reference has been set is changed, and writing is
performed to the reference device in the time up till when that changed is recognized by the VT3 (time is required
for the VT3 to recognize changed values in index devices as communications is performed serially between the
VT3 and the PLC), writing cannot be performed to the correct reference destination. (In other words, changes in
the index device values are not reflected.)
For example,
Switch (1): Switch to which word set function "indirect reference" is set
Switch (2): Switch to which word set function (changes value of index device of switch (1)) is set
The change on switch (2) is not reflected even if switch (1) is touched immediately after switch (2) is touched.
• Up to 64 indirect reference devices may be located per screen.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"

6-48 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-9 Calculation

Type of Calculation
Calculations are categorized into the following three types:
• For regular screens: Single-number/read calculations
• For regular screens: Multiple-number/read calculations
• For regular screens: Single-number/read calculations
For details on calculations, refer to the following description.

About "Read calculations" and "Write calculations"

Read calculations
These are used in reference device settings, for example, for parts or graphic attribute controls.
The result of having performed a calculation on the value of a PLC device is used as the value of reference devices in parts
and graphic attribute controls, for example. 6
Read calculation setting example

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Numerical value display
The result of the calculation is displayed on the numerical value display.

Graphic attribute controls


Drawn graphics are controlled by the result of calculation.
Color and Line
Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Direction Chart, XY Chart Setting of


The result of the calculation is displayed on graphs. Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-49


6-9 Calculation

Write calculations
Write calculations are used only on "Write word device" settings in numerical value display.
The result of performing a calculation on a numerical value entered on a numeric keypad on a numerical keypad is
written to a PLC device.

Numerical value display


Calculations are processed on values entered on numeric keypads, and the result of the calculation is written to a
write word device.

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Single-number calculation/Multiple-number calculation

There are two types of read calculations, single- and multiple-number, depending on the number of data items.
Only single-number calculations apply to write calculations.
When the device setting of each part is either a single word or a single bit, the calculation is a single-number calculation,
and when the device setting is a multiplenumber word, the calculation is a multiple-number calculation.

Single-number calculations
Used in the operations of the parts (not including Direction Chart, XY Chart) and graphical attribute controls.
For example, in a numerical value display

The result of A x B is
Value of PLC device: A Calculation: A x B
displayed on the VT3.

There is only one device targeted for the calculation.

Multiple-number calculations
Only used in the operations of direction charts and XY charts.
In trend graphs (real time)

The result of calculation (1) x A + B


is displayed on the VT3.
Value (1) of trend sample device
The result of calculation (2) x A + B
Value (2) of trend sample device is displayed on the VT3.
Calculation:
XxA+B

Value (8) of trend sample device The result of calculation (8) x A + B


is displayed on the VT3.
Multiple devices ((1) to (8) is taken as X) are targetedfor calculation.

6-50 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-9 Calculation

Setting Calculation
This section describes how to set calculations.
How to open the "Device settings" window (calculation)
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Item Description
Data type Displays "Calculation" in the case of a calculation.
Result Displays whether or not the result of the "Expression" is bit or word.
Sets the calculation formula using "variable" and operator from the key pads.
The calculation formula can also be selected from the standard formula list by pressing the button .
Expression
You can also select from a saved log of the latest four formulas that you have set. (Only formula
different from the standard list are saved to this log.)
Conversion Converts the variables (A to E, X) set at "Expression" to a device name or numerical value, and then
expression displays the conversion result.
Sets the variables (A to E) to be used in the calculation formula. Select "Word data/bit data", and set
Variables*1
the device in the "Device settings" window.
Key pads *1 Select the variable or operator to be used at "Expression".
*1 For details, see the following description.
Color and Line
Type
About variables in calculations
Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts


Calculation Number of Variables Symbol
Single-number/read calculation 5 A to E Fonts

Multiple-number/read calculation 4(+1) A to D (X)


Text Codes
Single-number/write calculation 4(+1) A to D (X)
Device
X : (multiple number/read calculation) the direction sample devices of a direction chart / XY chart, the reference
Setting of
word devices of the ideal curves in a XY chart.
Devices

Indirect reference
Value entered by numeric keypad in (single-number/write calculation) numerical value display
Calculation

Point The same variables (A to E, X) can be used twice or more in calculation.


However, note that the maximum number of variables that can be set is five.
For example, AxA + B + C + D (five variables) can be set, whereas AxA + B + C + D + E (six
variables) cannot.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-51


6-9 Calculation

Operator

6
Classifications Functions *1 Symbol
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Start of priority change (


Parentheses
End of priority change )
Addition +
Subtraction -
Four arithmetic operations Multiplication *
Division /
Remainder %
Bit AND AND
Bit operation Bit OR OR
Bit XOR XOR
Logical inversion !
Logic operation Conditional logical OR |
Conditional logical AND &
Left side > Right side >
Left side >= Right side >=
Left side = Right side =
Compare
Left side < Right side <
Left side <= Right side <=
Left side <> Right side *2 <>
*1 high ()
 !
Priority order * / % AND OR XOR
+ -

> >= = < <= <>
low &|
With operators of the same priority, calculation is executed from the left side of the formula.
*2 The same applies to A< >B and ! (A=B).

6-52 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-9 Calculation

Examples using logical operators


Expression Result
!1 0(OFF)
!A
!0 1(ON)
!(A>B) !(100>99) 0(OFF)
0|0 0(OFF)
A|B 0|1 1(ON)
1|1 1(ON)
(A>B)|(C< >D) (100>99)|(200< >100) 1(ON)
0&0 0(OFF)
A&B 0&1 0(OFF)
1&1 1(ON)
(A>B)&(C< >D) (100>99)&(200< >100) 1(ON)

Examples using bit operators


Expression Result
A AND B
A OR B
1234H AND F0F0H
1234H OR F0F0H
1030H
F2F4H
6
A XOR B 1234H XOR F0F0H E2C4H

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Examples using numerical value relative operators
Expression Result
100>99 1(ON)
A>B 100>100 0(OFF)
100>101 0(OFF)
100>=99 1(ON)
A>=B 100>=100 1(ON)
100>=101 0(OFF)
100=99 0(OFF)
A=B 100=100 1(ON)
100=101 0(OFF)
100<99 0(OFF)
A<B 100<100 0(OFF) Color and Line
100<101 1(ON) Type
100<=99 0(OFF)
A<=B 100<=100 1(ON) Touch Switches
100<=101 1(ON)
Key Entry Parts
100<>99 1(ON)
A<>B 100<>100 0(OFF) Fonts
100<>101 1(ON)
Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-53


6-9 Calculation

How to set calculations


This section describes how to set calculations.

1 Set "Expression" using variables and operators on the "Key pads".


"Conversion expression" is displayed.

2 Set each of the variables (A to E) used in "Expression".


Click the field for setting "Bit/Word" and press the button to select from "Bit/Word".
Next, click the field for setting the device, and press the button . The "Device settings" window is displayed.

When Bit is selected


Select from "Bit value/PLC device/Cell" for the data type.

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Select from bit value "ON/OFF". Set the PLC device.


(ON:1 OFF:0)

Set the worksheet ID and cell position.

6-54 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-9 Calculation

When Word is selected


Select from "Numerical values/PLC device/Cell" for the data type.

Set the numerical value. Set the PLC device.


6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Set the worksheet ID and cell position.

3 Click the "OK" button.


Color and Line
Type

This completes setting of calculations.


Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-55


6-9 Calculation

Calculation Precision and Data Format Conversion Rules


When calculations are used, the calculation precision when calculations are processed internally on the VT3 is
determined from the data format of the variables used in calculation formulas. To correctly display the results of
calculations performed in accordance with this calculation precision on parts to which calculations are set, the data
format of the part must be matched to the calculation formula.

Types of calculation precision


The calculation precision (data format) when calculations are processed internally on the VT3 is automatically
selected from the following three types to match the data format of the variables set to the calculation formula:
(1) 2-word unsigned decimal
(2) 2-word signed decimal
(3) Float

6 • If the variable in the calculation formula contains even one float (real numbers), the precision becomes Float.
• If the variable in the calculation formula does not contain a float (real numbers), but contains even one item of
signed data, the precision becomes 2-word signed decimal.
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

• Otherwise, the precision becomes 2-word unsigned decimal.

There are other rules in addition to the above for handling bits in calculations.

Range of numerical values that can be handled by calculation precision


Calculation Precision Range
2-word unsigned decimal 0 to 4294967295
2-word signed decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647
Float real number -3.40282347x1038 to 3.40282347x1038
Boolean 0,1

Calculation precision that can be used in operators


Operator Calculation Precision
2-word unsigned 2-word signed
Type Symbol Float
decimal decimal
Arithmetic
+, -, *, /   
operations
Remainder %   X*1
Sign inversion - X*1  
Bit operator AND, OR, XOR  *2 X*1
Compare operator >, >=, =, <=, <, <>   
Logical
!, &, | - - -
operator
*1 This results in a calculation error. Set the calculation formula again.
*2 Pay attention to bit calculations when the variable is a negative value.

Point A calculation formula conversion error will occur if calculation formulas are described in a
data format that is not supported.

6-56 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-9 Calculation

Data format conversion rules


The following describes conversion rules for data format.

Data format (1) (data format set for each variable in calculation formula, data format of parts to which
calculations are set)
• 1-word unsigned decimal
• 1-word signed decimal
• 1-word BCD
• 2-word unsigned decimal
• 2-word signed decimal
• 2-word BCD
• Float real number

[Example] Example of data format set to each variable in calculations

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Color and Line
[Example] Example of data format of parts to which calculations are set Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

Data format (2) (calculation precision when calculations are processed internally on VT3)
• 2-word unsigned decimal
• 2-word signed decimal
• Float

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-57


6-9 Calculation

Conversion rules
Either of the following rules is applied during data conversion.
(1) Data format (1) Data format (2)
(data format set to each variable in calculations) ->(calculation precision when calculations are processed
internally on VT3)

(2) Data format (1) Data format (2)


(calculation precision when calculations are processed internally on VT3)  (data format of write word devices)

Conversion rule (1) when referencing data (variables) of data format different from calculation
precision
How to handle values of variables in calculation processing
Calculation Precision
Data Format of Variable 2-word unsigned 2-word signed
Float

6 1-word unsigned decimal


decimal
Use as it is
decimal
Use as it is Decimal -> Float real number
1-word signed decimal - Use as it is Decimal -> Float real number
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

BCD -> Decimal BCD -> Decimal


1-word BCD BCD  Decimal conversion -> Float
conversion conversion
2-word unsigned decimal Use as it is Use as it is *1 Decimal -> Float real number
2-word signed decimal - Use as it is Decimal -> Float real number
BCD -> Decimal BCD -> Decimal BCD -> Decimal conversion -> Float
2-word BCD
conversion conversion real number
Float real number - - Use as it is

*1 A calculation error occurs when post-conversion values exceed the allowable data range of the data format.

Point Pay attention to the effective digits when the calculation precision is a Float.

Conversion rule (2) when the calculation precision differs from the data format of the write word
device
How the result of calculation is handled on write word devices
Calculation Precision
written to a word device 2-word unsigned
2-word signed decimal
Data Format decimal Float

After float -> binary conversion,


1-word unsigned decimal Discard uppermost word Discard uppermost word
Discard uppermost word *1
After float -> binary conversion,
1-word signed decimal Discard uppermost word Discard uppermost word
Discard uppermost word *1
After binary -> BCD After binary -> BCD
Float -> Decimal conversion ->
conversion, conversion,
1-word BCD After float binary conversion, discard
Discard uppermost word Discard uppermost word
*2 *2.3 uppermost word *1,2,3

2-word unsigned decimal Use as it is Use as it is *1 Float -> Decimal conversion *1


2-word signed decimal Use as it is *1 Use as it is Float -> Decimal conversion *1
Decimal -> BCD Decimal -> BCD conversion Float -> Decimal conversion ->
2-word BCD
conversion *2 *2.3 BCD conversion *1,2,3
Float real number Decimal -> Float Decimal -> Float Use as it is

*1 A calculation error occurs when post-conversion values exceed the allowable data range of the data format.
*2 Incrementing of digits is ignored when 9999 (99999999 when manipulating two words) is exceeded.
*3 A calculation error occurs when the result of calculation is a minus number.

6-58 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-9 Calculation

The result is as follows depending on the preset calculation precision and data format of write word devices.

Example 1 When the calculation precision is 2-word unsigned decimal, and the setting of the data format of the
write word device in the numerical value display is 1-word unsigned decimal
Calculation result 100000 (decimal) = 186A0 (Hex)
-> Write result 34464 (decimal) = 86A0 (Hex)

Example 2 When the calculation precision is 2-word signed decimal, and the setting of the data format of the
write word device in the numerical value display is 1-word unsigned decimal
Calculation result -40000 (decimal) = FFFF63C0 (Hex)
-> Write result 25536 (decimal) = 63C0 (Hex)

Example 3 When the calculation precision is Float, and the setting of the data format of the write word device in
the numerical value display is 1-word unsigned decimal
Calculation result 10.254
-> Write result 10
6
When the data format of the write word device is converted to from the calculation precision,

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Point
"omission of digits" or "rounding" of numerical values occurs.
When the calculation precision is Float, and the data format of the write word device is 2-word
decimal, the 2-word decimal data format has more effective digits than Float data format. This
means that there will be fewer effective digits when the result is displayed on a numerical
value display (2-word signed decimal) after Float is calculated in unit conversion, for
example, by calculation.
For these reasons, pay attention to calculation precision and data format conversion rules
when using calculations.

Reference The result is as follows depending on the preset calculation precision and data format of reference
word devices.

Example 1 When the calculation precision is 2-word signed decimal, and the setting of the data Color and Line
format of the reference word device in the numerical value display is 1-word unsigned Type

decimal Touch Switches


Calculation result: Minus number -> Reference result: Calculation error
Key Entry Parts

Example 2 When the calculation precision is Float, and the setting of the data format of the Fonts

reference word device in the numerical value display is 1-word unsigned decimal Text Codes

Calculation result: 1.23 x 10 20 -> Reference result: Calculation error Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-59


6-9 Calculation

Cautions in Calculations

Cautions Relating to Calculation of Remainder


Dividend / divisor = Quotient
Dividend % divisor = Remainder
Based upon the above, the result of calculation becomes as follows:
A calculation result where the sign of the dividend and the remainder match is returned.

10 / 3 = 3 10 % 3 = 1
-10 / 3 = -3 -10 % 3 = -1
10 / (-3) = -3 10 % (-3) = 1
-10 / (-3) = 3 -10 % (-3) = -1

Operation where the result is an out-of-range value during calculation


6 Calculation Precision Calculation formula (example) Result Remarks
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

0-1= 4294967295
2-word unsigned decimal 4294967295+1= 0
1/0= Division by Zero
-2147483648-1= 2147483647
2-word signed decimal 2147483647+1= -2147483648
1/0= Division by Zero
-3.40282347x1038- Calculation Error The allowable numerical
3.40282347x1038+ Calculation Error value range is exceeded.
Float real number -1.17549x10-38+ Calculation Error The value was considerably
1.17549x10-38- Calculation Error small close to 0.
1/0= Division by Zero

Result of special calculation


2-word signed decimal : With sign inversion of -2147483648, the result is the same as the value before
inversion.
1-word signed decimal : With sign inversion of -32768, the result is the same as the value before inversion.

Example of cautions in calculation formulas


Addition/subtraction of float (real numbers): Due to the relationship with effective digits, the result of calculations
A+(B+C) and (A+B)+C is not the same.
Multiplication, division : For example, when making indivisible divisions, the result of calculations
(A/B)*C and (A*C)/B is not the same.
10/3*3=9 10*3/3=10

Operation at a calculation error


"Calculation Error" is displayed at the bottom left of the screen for all write calculations.

6-60 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-9 Calculation

Calculation Setting Example


To perform unit conversion on value (2000) of PLC device: DM00000 and display the result "2" on the VT3 numerical
value display, set as follows:
Reference word device : Calculation
Calculation formula : DM00000/1000
DM00000 : 1-word unsigned decimal

To only display the calculation result on the VT3, there is no need to unmark the key entry checkbox and set the next
write word device, set as follows:

Alternatively, to enter value "3" resulting from unit conversion on the numeric keypad after touching that numerical
value display, and then set the value of PLC device: DM00000 to (3000)
Write word device : DM00000 (Set also the data length and data format.)
Calculation
Calculation formula
: Mark this checkbox.
: X *1000 (inverse of previous calculation) 6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Color and Line
Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-61


6-9 Calculation

2 Touch numerical value display "2".


CANCEL ENTER
END

Frame blinks. 2 Enter "3" on the numeric keypad.


(Active mode)
CANCEL ENTER
END

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

3 Numerical value display indicates "3".


CANCEL ENTER
END

Press "Enter". (At this time, the numerical value


2
display on VT3 displays "2" momentarily.)
CANCEL ENTER
END

2 Inverse operation (X * '1000') is executed,


and 3000 is written to DM00000 on the PLC.
CANCEL ENTER
END

PLC

3 Calculation (DM00000/'1000') is executed, and


"3" is displayed on the numerical value display.
CANCEL ENTER
END

6-62 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT
This chapter describes how to set graphics and text.

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


7-1 Setting Graphics ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-2
7-2 Image Setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-5
7-3 Setting Decorative Frames ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-6
7-4 Setting Outline Text •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-7
7-5 Setting Bitmap Text •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-10
7-6 Setting Memos•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-11
7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-12

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-1


7-1 Setting Graphics

Types of Graphics and Drawing Graphics


The following graphics can be drawn on VT STUDIO :
Type Line Art Graphic Paint Graphic
line  -
Continuous lines  -
Rectangles  
Graphics

Polygons  
Circles/Ellipses  
Arc  -
Fan  

1 Either select from the Menu in order, or click the button on the tool bar.
• Line : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Lines"
• Continuous lines : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Continuous lines"
• Rectangles : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Rectangles"

7
Polygons : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Polygons"
• Circles/Ellipses : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Circles/Ellipses"
• Arc : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Arc"
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT

• Fan : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Fan"

Reference Draw a Figure


(1) To draw a line, press Shift and at the same time drag&drop the cursor.
•Line: Dragging direction can be horizontal, vertical, and 45° direction.
•Rectangles: Get a square.
•Circles/Ellipses: Get a circle.
(2) Press Ctrl and at the same time drag&drop the cursor. The starting position becomes the center
of the geometric figure.
•Rectangles: The starting point now becomes the center of the geometric figure.
•Circles/Ellipses: The starting point now becomes the center of the circle.
•Arc/Fan : The starting point now becomes the center of the circle.
(3) Press both Shift and Ctrl at the same time and drag the cursor, one of the functions described in
(1) and (2) becomes active.

7-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7-1 Setting Graphics

Setting Graphics
Set graphic attributes such as line type, line color and screen color for drawn graphics in the "Property" window.

1 Click the button on the tool bar, and select the graphic whose attribute is to be set.
The selection frame is displayed on the perimeter of the selected graphic.
Also, the "Property" window is displayed.

2 Set the graphic attributes in the "Property" window.


Set the graphic attributes of lines, continuous lines, rectangles, polygons, circles/ ellipses, arcs, and fans.
Some items cannot be set depending on the graphic. Items that cannot be set are displayed faint.

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


Item Description
Line
When this checkbox is marked, line type, line color and arrow can be set.
attribute(L)
Selects the line type. This item can be set only when drawing straight lines, continuous
Line type(T)*2
lines or paint graphics when the "Line attribute" checkbox is marked.
Line attribute *1
Line Select the line color. This item can be set only when drawing straight lines, continuous Graphics
color(C)*2 lines or paint graphics when the "Line attribute" checkbox is marked.
Image
Select from "None/Start point/End point/ Both ends" for the arrow setting. This item can be
Arrows(A)
set only when drawing straight lines or continuous lines. Decorative frames
When this checkbox is marked, the inside of the graphic is filled and the graphic is turned
Plane
into a paint graphic. This item can be set only drawing rectangles, polygons, circles/ Outline text
Plane attribute(P)
ellipses, and fans.
attribute Bitmap text
Plane
Select the color of the plane.
color(N)*2 Memo
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at
BLK(L)*2 Graphic attribute
all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval. controls
When this checkbox is marked, the four corners of the rectangle are rounded. The part
Chamfer(M)
Chamfer blinks at all times on the VT2 screen at the set interval.
Radius(R) Set the corner radius at this item.
Start angle Sets the start/end angle within the range 0 to 359 deg. This item can be set only when
Arc/Fan*3
End angle drawing arcs and fans.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-3


7-1 Setting Graphics

*1 When this checkbox is marked, an outer frame line is attached when drawing rectangles, polygons, circles/
ellipses, arcs, and fans.
*2 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
*3 The start angle and end angle are set as follows:

Arc
(Setting example)
End
angle
End angle 45° Start angle45°

0° 0°
Start
angle
0° Start angle 315° End angle 315°

Fan
(Setting example)

7 End
angle
End angle 45° Start angle 45
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT

0° 0°
Start
angle
0° Start angle 315° End angle 315

Reference "4-1 Editing Graphics"


• Making graphics blink
• Display/hide a figure
• Changing line type and line color
• Changing the color of paint graphics
• Changing the position of graphics
"7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls"
• Line type, line color, screen color and other defaults
"Option Settings", page 4-22

7-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7-2 Image Setting
Image is a function for pasting Windows bitmap files or JPEG files to screens.

Image Setting
Parts(P) -> Graphics(F) -> Image(I)

Specify bitmap images in the "Open Image" window.


The "Open Image" window is displayed by one of the following methods:
• Double-click the figure.
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By clicking the right mouse button and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to be opened.
File name(N) Select the name of the file to be opened.
Files of type(T) Select the type of file.
Original size(Z) When this checkbox is marked, the image is displayed on VT3 at the bitmap file image size.
When this checkbox is marked, the color information of bitmap images is converted to a gray
Gray scale(G)
scale image.
When this checkbox is marked, the image is dithered. Dithering is used to make the boundary
Dithering(D) between colors stand out when reduction to the VT32's display color (32768) colors is
performed. Graphics
Frame width(F) Specify the width of the area that is not to be resized in dots (0 to 32) when the image is resized.
Image
If you click this button, a preview of the image after reduction to the VT3's display color (32768)
After conversion
colors, dithering, and gray scale processing is displayed. Decorative frames
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
Outline text

Bitmap text

Point • Specify 8-bit (256 color) or 24-bit (True Color) Memo


Windows bitmap file or JPEG file as the bitmap file format.
Graphic attribute
• Of JPEG formats, progressive JPEG format is not supported. controls

Reference By draging & dropping a file in an Edit screen of VT STUDIO, it becomes a figure part which can be set.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-5


7-3 Setting Decorative Frames

Setting Decorative Frames


Parts(P) -> Graphics(F) -> Decorative frame(D)

Set decorative frames in the "Decorative frame" window.


The "Decorative frame" window is displayed by one of the following methods:
• Double-click a decorative frame.
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By clicking the right mouse button and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu

7 STYLE
Item
Select the style of the decorative frame.
Description

COLOR Select the color of the decorative frame.


SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT

7-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7-4 Setting Outline Text

Setting Outline Text


Parts(P) -> Text(T) -> Outline text(O)

The "Property" window is displayed by clicking outline text.

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


Item Description
Font name(N) Sets the font name of the text string to draw.
Size(Z) Set the font size of the text string to be drawn.
Auto-size(A) Automatically adjusts the font size and kerning.
Kerning(I) Set the spacing between characters.
Rotate(R) Select rotation angle for text from rotating towards right "0º/90º/180º/270º&quo